The Project Gutenberg EBook of Genuine Mediumship or The Invisible Powers, by

Bhakta Vishita

This eBook is for the use of anyone anywhere at no cost and with
almost no restrictions whatsoever. You may copy it, give it away or
re-use it under the terms of the Project Gutenberg License included
with this eBook or online at www.gutenberg.org

Title: Genuine Mediumship or The Invisible Powers

Author: Bhakta Vishita

Release Date: May 5, 2008 [EBook #25337]

Language: English

Character set encoding: ISO-8859-1

*** START OF THIS PROJECT GUTENBERG EBOOK GENUINE MEDIUMSHIP ***

Produced by Suzanne Lybarger, Brian Janes and the Online

Distributed Proofreading Team at http://www.pgdp.net

Transcriber's Note:

Obvious typographical errors have been corrected in this text. For a complete list, please see the bottom
of this document.

Genuine Mediumship
OR

The Invisible Powers

By
 SWAMI BHAKTA VISHITA
(Hindoo Master)
Author of Seership, the Science of Knowing the Future
ADVANCED THOUGHT PUBLISHING CO.
812 W. Van Buren St., Chicago, Ill.
English Representatives
L. N. FOWLER & CO., 7 Imperial Arcade,
Ludgate Circus, London, England
Copyright, 1919
By
ADVANCED THOUGHT PUBLISHING CO.
Chicago, Ill.

CONTENTS
PART I.
NATURE'S FINER FORCES
Knowledge versus Faith. Supernormal, not Supernatural. Supernormal, not Abnormal. The
Prevailing Ignorance. Prejudice Against the Unusual. Great Changes Impending. The
Naturalness of Occult Powers. The World of Vibrations. Super-sensible Vibrations. Unseen
Worlds. Interpenetrating Planes and Worlds. Manifold Planes of Existence. Planes and
Vibrations. The Higher Senses of Man. The World of Sensation. A Senseless World. The
Elemental Sense. The Raw Material of Thought. The Evolution of the Senses. Unfoldment
of New Senses. Discovery of New Worlds. We Sense Only Vibratory Motion. The Higher
Planes of Nature. An Appeal to Reason 7
PART II.
MENTAL VIBRATIONS AND TRANSMISSION
The Higher Forces. Chitta, or Mind Substance. What Modern Science Says. A Living
Dynamic Focus. Dynamic Correlate of Thought. Answer to Skeptical Critics. The World of
Vibrations. Unchartered Seas of Vibration. The Human Wireless Telegraph Instrument. A
Great Scientist's Theory. Human-Electro-Magnetism. Human Etherical Force. The Brain-
Battery. A Peculiar Organ. The Pineal Gland. Transmission of Thought. A General
Principle. Transformation of Vibrations. Example of Electric Light. Example of Wireless
Telegraphy. Example of Light Waves. Transformation of Mental Vibrations. Vibrational
Attunement. In Tune with the Higher Planes. Two Key-Words 31
PART III.
THOUGHT TRANSFERENCE
Involuntary Transmission of Mental Vibrations. Thought Waves. Vibratory Thought Force.
Mental Atmospheres. The Categories of Thought. Mental Whirlpools. Mental Tidal Waves.
Immunity to Thought Influences. Mental Attunement. Voluntary Transmission of Mental
Vibrations. Voluntary Mental Influence. White Magic. Black Magic. Base Use of Mind
Power. The Secret of Witchcraft. Modern Black Magic. The Explanation of Sorcery. The
Power of Fearthought. The Negative Pole. Voodooism Explained. Self-Protection.
Repelling Adverse Influences. Telepathic Phenomena. Scientific Investigators. How
Experiments are Conducted. Private Experiments. Development of Telepathic Power.
"Mind Reading." Development Practices. The "Willing Game." Formal Tests. Automatic
Writing. Psychic Sensitiveness 53
PART IV.
CLAIRVOYANCE AND KINDRED PHENOMENA
Clairvoyance Defined. The Phenomena of Clairvoyance. Classification of Clairvoyant
Phenomena. Psychometry. The "Psychic Scent." Magnetic Affinity. Distant En Rapport.
Psychic Underground Explorations. Psychic Detective Work. How to Psychometrize.
Developing Psychometry. Varieties of Psychometry. Psychometric "Getting in Touch."
Psychometric Readings. Crystal Gazing, etc. Crystals and Bright Objects. The Care of the
Crystal. How To Use the Crystal. The "Milky Mist." Classes of Psychic Pictures. General
Directions for Crystal Gazing. Selection of Place, etc. Adjusting the Crystal. Time of
Sitting. Other Persons Present. Crystalline Vision. Physical Requirements. Determining
Time of Fulfillment. Two Classes of Visions. Time and Space in Crystal Gazing. Direct
Clairvoyance. Trance Conditions. Clairvoyant Reverie. The Dawn of Clairvoyance.
Methods of Development 79
PART V.
CLAIRVOYANCE: PAST, PRESENT AND FUTURE
Present Clairvoyance. The Human Aura. The Prana Aura. The Auric Colors. Thought
Forms. The X-Ray Sense. Microscopic Vision. Space Clairvoyance. The Psychic
Telescope. Radio-Activity. Sensing the Higher Vibrations. Viewing Distant Scenes. Time
Clairvoyance. Past Time Clairvoyance. The Mystery Seeing the Past. Analogies of the
Physical Plane. Thousand Year Old Light. Reading the Light Waves. The Akashic Plane.
The Akashic Records. Degrees of Clairvoyant Vision. "The Memory of Nature."
Involuntary Clairvoyance. Future Time Clairvoyance. Seeing What Has Not Yet Happened.
Simple Prevision. The Nature of Time. The Oriental Teaching. The Eternal Now. Absolute
Time 105
PART VI.
MEDIUMSHIP
What is Mediumship? Ancient Mediumship. Mediumship and Religious Belief. The Ideals 133
of Modern Spiritualism. Immortality Demonstrated Through Mediumship. The Truth of
Personal Survival. The Gateway of Mediumship. The Mediumistic Character. Mediumistic
Sensitivity. The Higher Vibratory Forces. Psychic Attunement. The Development of
Mediumship. Unconscious Mediumship. Mediumship and Individuality. Co-operation of
Medium and Spirits. Mediumship Not Dangerous. Rational Mediumship. The "Home
Circle." The Cure For Fraudulent Mediumship. Warning to Young Mediums
PART VII.
MEDIUMISTIC CONDITIONS
Physical Phenomena. "Psychic Force." Human Magnetism. "Zoether." "Prana." Mental
Phenomena. The Value of Phenomena. Trance Condition Not Essential. Scientific Reports
on Phenomena. Phenomena Without Darkness. Test Conditions. Is Darkness Necessary?
Developing Circles. Impersonating Mediumship. The Proper Mental Condition. Proof of
Spirit Identity. The "Trance Condition." Spirit Impersonation. Spirit Suggestion. Psychic
Attunement. Automatic Writing. Inspirational Speaking. Gradual Development of Powers.
Spirit Guides. No Loss of Individuality. Mediumship Beneficial. Mediumship and the Bible 153
PART VIII.
HOW TO DEVELOP MEDIUMSHIP
Who are Mediumistic? The Mediumistic Temperament. Is Mediumship Desirable?
Developing the Natural Power. Mediumship and Genius. Spontaneous Mediumship.
Mediumistic Flashes. Systematic Development. The Development Circle. The Aspirational
Attitude. Natural Unfoldment. Persistent Watchful Waiting. Building Lines of
Communication. Developing Concentration. The Call for Illumination. The Jacob's Ladder
of Communion. What a Development Circle Is. Forming the Development Circle. The
Sitters in the Circle. The Spirit Communication Code. The Matter of Time Conditions.
Opening the Seance. Developing a Medium. The Personnel of the Circle. Changing the
Sitters. Adding a Medium. Reasons for Changes. Psychic Attunement. Pre-Test
Manifestations. Premature Tests. Forcing Tests. Spirit Directions. Questioning the Spirits.
Substance and Shadow 173
PART IX.
MEDIUMISTIC PHENOMENA
The Part Played by the Sitters. Result of Bad Sitters. Mental Atmosphere of the Medium.
The Mediumistic Mind. Mediumistic "Stage Fright." The Psychic Telephone System.
Interrupted Communications. Some Difficulties of the Spirits. Difficulties Overcome. The
Psychic Triangle. Harmonious Relationship. The Discord Note. Antagonistic Elements. The
Open Mind. Spirits and the Sense of Humor. Rhythmic Harmony. Retarding Factors.
Reasonable Demands of Spirits. Harmonious Conditions. The Channel of Communication.
The Role of the Spirits. Difficulties Among Spirits. Disturbing elements. Impersonation
Mediumship. True Purpose of Mediumship. Gradual Development. Public Seances. Home
Circle Development. Undue Prolongation of Seances. Good Advice to Young Mediums.
Self-Protection for Mediums 200
PART X.
EXPERIENCES IN THE CIRCLE
Signs of Spirit Presence. Spirit Rappings. Table Tippings. The Spirit Signals. Flashes of 229
Communication. Spirit Code-Signals. Ouija Boards. A Homemade Ouija Board. Trance or
Inspirational Mediumship. Symptoms of Trance Conditions. The Entranced Stage. Trance
Phenomena. Entering the Trance. Advice to Trance Mediums. Speaking Mediumship.
Public-Speaking Under Control. Spirit Advice and Counsel. Impersonating Manifestations.
Incidents of Impersonation. Incidents of Inspirational Mediumship. Value of Identification.
Fraudulent Claims of Identity. Guarding Against Fraudulent Spirits. Spirit Jokers. A
Typical Case of Identification. Recalling Past Incidents. Identifying Property. Identifying
Historical Personages
PART XI.
HIGHER SPIRIT MANIFESTATIONS
Spirit Psychometry and Clairvoyance. Spirit Psychic Assistance. Writing Mediumship.
Incidents of Writing Mediumship. Developing Writing Mediumship. Stead's Method and
Results. Automatic Writing vs. Inspirational Writing. Use and Abuse of Automatic Writing.
Advice to Writing Mediums. Drawing Mediumship. The Planchette. How to Use the
Planchette. Healing Mediumship. How To Heal by Spirit Power. Materialization
Mediumship. The Spirit Cabinet Is Necessary. How To Make the Spirit Cabinet. How To
Use the Spirit Cabinet. Spirit Phosphorescence. Appearance of Materialized Substance.
Materialized Spirit Forms. Scientific Proof of Materialization. How To Conduct a
Materializing Seance. Trumpet Mediumship. Spirit Playing on Musical Instruments.
Independent Slate Writing. The Slate Writing Circle. Spirit Paintings. Practical Advice to
Developing Mediums 251

PART I
NATURE'S FINER FORCES

One of the most common mistaken conceptions of the average student of the occult sciences, and
of so-called "psychic phenomena" in general, is that which may be expressed by the term
"supernatural." This term, as you know, is used to express the idea of "that which is outside of
the realm of Nature, and of Nature's laws."

Knowledge Versus Faith

As a matter of fact, as all the advanced students and teachers of the occult doctrine know full
well, we have no direct knowledge whatsoever of anything that is "outside of the realm of nature,
and of Nature's laws." It is true that we may, by an act of faith, profess to believe in powers and
beings entirely apart from the great realm of Nature—in fact, most persons do believe in such
powers and beings in connection with their formal religion—but their belief is entirely within the
category of Faith, and is not even pretended to be based upon actual experience and phenomenal
manifestation.
The moment that there appears any manifestation which is possible of being known to, or
experienced by, the human senses, ordinary or extraordinary, that moment the phenomena and
the immediate cause thereof must be regarded as being properly classed in the category of
"natural." This is true not only of such phenomena as are perceived by means of our ordinary
five senses, but also of those which are perceptible only to the highest powers of perception, or
higher senses, which are latent in all 8 human beings but which are unfolded only in the case of a
comparatively few individuals of the race.
It should be clearly understood by all students of occultism or psychic phenomena that man's
knowledge and experience, normal or supernormal, is confined to the realm of Nature. There is a
"ring pass-not" around the boundaries of the Kingdom of Nature which mortals cannot pass, no
matter how high may be their degree of development and advancement. Even those great mystics
whose writings are filled with the startling revelations of "union with the Divine," and of "At-
one-ment with Deity," are under no illusion concerning this fact they know full well that only in
so far as Deity involves itself in Nature—wraps itself up in the garments of Nature—can it be
directly experienced by man, and thus actually known by him.

Supernormal, Not Supernatural

Perhaps a clearer understanding of this important subject will be had if we but substitute the term
"supernormal" for that of "supernatural." The term "supernormal" is not commonly employed,
and but few know that such a word is to be found in the dictionaries, much less know its
meaning; but a study of its meaning, and its adoption in our thinking, will serve to give us a
clearer conception of the true nature of many strange phases of experience of which we have
become conscious, either by reasons of their manifestation by ourselves, or else by the
manifestation on the part of others. It will accordingly be well for us to carefully examine this
term and its meaning.
9

"Subnormal" means: "Beyond, above, or exceeding that which is normal; extraordinary,

inexplicable perhaps, but not supernatural." Now, the term "normal" means: "Conforming to a
certain standard, rule, or type"; hence, anything that is "supernormal" is something that is above
the usual pattern, rule, or type.
There is an important distinction to be noted here, to-wit: a thing may be outside of the usual
pattern, rule, or type, in the sense of being inferior to or under the ordinary standard, and in this
case is known as "abnormal," the latter term being employed as a term of depreciation. On the
other hand, the "outside of the standard" quality may consist of a superiority to the prevailing
standard, and accordingly is entitled to be classed in the category of the "supernormal"—the
prefix "super" meaning "above, over, higher, etc."
It is important that the distinction be made clearly between the use and meaning of these two
terms, "abnormal" and "supernormal," respectively. The first named denotes inferiority, and the
latter denotes superiority. This distinction may be more clearly apprehended by means of a
concrete example, as follows:
On our own plane of existence the senses of sight and hearing, respectively, are included in the
usual standard, pattern, and type of sense normality—every normal person possesses these senses
in a certain general degree of power; hence, on this plane of existence, a person born blind, or
deaf, is spoken of as "abnormal," that is to say, such a person is deficient in regard to the sense
powers.
10

On the contrary, let us imagine a plane of existence, in which the great majority of individuals
lack the power of sight and hearing, respectively. On such a plane of existence, the occasional
individual who was born possessed of the powers of sight and hearing, respectively, would be
properly regarded as "supernormal," that is to say, such a person would be superior to the
ordinary run of individuals—above them, in fact. The term "abnormal" means minus the
ordinary standard quality; and the term "supernormal" means plus the ordinary standard
quality. And yet both the "plus" and the "minus" would be "outside" the normal type, though
there is a difference as wide as that between the two poles, in this "outsideness."

Supernormal, Not Abnormal

The above important statement concerning the distinction between the "abnormal" and
"supernormal" is not made merely for the purpose of academic differentiation and classification.
On the other hand, it is made because there is a most pernicious tendency on the part of the
ignorant and unthinking portions of the public to regard and to classify certain high phases of
occult and psychic manifestation of power as "abnormal," hence below the standard; whereas,
properly speaking, such manifestations of power are far above the standard, and, hence, clearly
entitled to the term "supernormal."

The Prevailing Ignorance

11

The ignorant and unthinking attitude of certain portions of the general public toward this class of
phenomena is akin to that of a community of blind and deaf persons, satisfied that their own
"three sense" standard is the highest possible one attainable by living creatures and that all
variation therefrom must be considered as "abnormal." In such a community there would
occasionally be born certain individuals possessed of the senses of sight and hearing, in addition
to the common three senses possessed by the entire community. Judging by what we know of the
tendency of human nature in such cases, we are warranted in conjuring that the ordinary run of
persons in such a community would revile the seeing and hearing individuals as "abnormal," and
their possessors therefore to be pitied, and perhaps shunned. Only the intelligent and thoughtful
members of such a community would be able to grasp the fact that these exceptional individuals
were really not only not "abnormal," and inferior to type, but that they were really
"supernormal," and superior to type.

Prejudice Against the Unusual.

Those to whom the above illustration may seem far-fetched, exaggerated, and unwarranted, are
asked to carefully consider the ignorant and unthinking attitude which the great majority of the
general public, at least at first, present toward that most wonderful display of supernormal
powers, known as "occult" or "psychic," made by the few highly developed 12 individuals of the
race who are able to manifest them to some degree. These individuals are regarded as "queer,"
and "strange," "unnatural," and "abnormal" by their ignorant and unthinking neighbors and
associates, just as the seeing and hearing exceptional individuals were likewise so regarded by
their blind and deaf neighbors in the above illustration. And, here as in the illustration it is only
the few intelligent and thinking individuals of the community who recognize that the departure
from the standard type is in the direction of advancement and gain, rather than of retrogression
and loss—a plus attribute, rather than a minus one. The illustration is startlingly true and in
accordance with the facts of the case, as many thoughtful persons know only to well, and admit
sadly.

Great Changes Impending

But it would be unjust and unfair to the general public were we to fail to add to the above
criticism the fact that there is underway a great change in the public opinion regarding this
important matter. More and more persons are becoming interested in Nature's Finer Forces every
day; more are becoming more familiar with the phenomena manifested by the gifted individuals
possessing these wondrous powers; and more are coming to realize that these powers are really
latent in all of the members of the human race, though lying dormant in the majority thereof, and
may be unfolded and brought into active manifestation by scientific methods of training and
development. But, even so, the student and teacher of this great 13 subject should carefully bear
in mind the important distinction above made between that which is "abnormal," and that which
is "supernormal"; and such should lose no opportunity in pointing out this important distinction
whenever the subject arises in conversation or argument—for the propaganda of truth should be
earnestly and vigorously pursued, in order that the world may be liberated from its chains of
error.

The Naturalness of the Occult Powers

Returning to the subject considered in the opening paragraphs of this book, namely, the
naturalness of the occult and psychic higher powers and the manifestation thereof, we strongly
advise all students of these subjects to acquire a working knowledge of the place in Nature
occupied by these powers and their manifestations. A little scientific information on this subject
will render the student better able to intelligently teach others concerning these matters, and also
to successfully defend himself when the ignorant and unthinking seek to attack the things which
are so dear to his heart, and so real and evident to himself. Many, by reason of their lack of
scientific knowledge on these points, not only fail to make converts to their cause of truth, but
often really drive away persons who might otherwise be interested. Many persons are really
interested in and attracted to the manifestations of the higher occult and psychic powers, but are
fearful of anything "unnatural" or "supernatural," and are disposed to be frightened off by any
suspicion 14 of such qualities in things. These same persons, if shown that the phenomena have a
perfectly valid scientific base in natural forces and laws, will throw aside their fears and will
become earnest investigators and students of this great subject. Hence, as we have said, every
teacher and student of this subject should know the true scientific natural basis thereof; and in the
following few pages we shall endeavor to plainly, though briefly, present these to you.

The World of Vibrations

Modern science furnishes abundant testimony to support and substantiate the teachings of the
ancient Hindu sages to the effect that everything in the Universe is in constant motion, which is
manifested by varying rates, degrees, and modes of vibration. The modern scientists, alike with
the ancient occultist, knows that the differences between the things of the Universe arise mainly
from the different rates, modes, and degrees of the vibrations manifested in the things
themselves. If we change the vibration of a thing, we practically change the manifested nature of
that thing. The difference between solid ice, liquid water, semi-gaseous vapor, and gaseous
steam is simply the difference caused by various rates of vibration caused by heat. The difference
between red and blue, green and violet, is simply that caused by varying rates of vibration. Light
and heat, as well as sound, depend for the differences upon rates of vibration.

Super-Sensible Vibrations.

Moreover, as every text book on science informs us, there are sounds too low as well as 15 those
too high for the human ear to register, but which are registered by delicate instruments. Again,
there are colors beyond the place of red, at one end of the visible spectrum; and others beyond
the place of violet at the other end of that spectrum, which the human eye is unable to register
and detect, but which our apparatus in the laboratory plainly register. The ray of light which
registers on the photographic plate, and which causes sunburn on our skin, is too high a rate of
vibration for our eyes to perceive. Likewise the X-Rays, and many other of the finer rays of light
known to science are imperceptible to the unaided human vision—they are actually "dark rays"
so far as the human eye is concerned, though man has devised instruments by means of which
they may be caught and registered.

The Higher Vibrations

The vibrations of magnetism and electricity are imperceptible to our sight, though they may be
registered by the appropriate apparatus; and if we had the proper sense of apparatus to perceive
them, these rays of vibratory force would open up a whole new world to us. Likewise, if we
could increase our power of hearing-perception, we would seem to be living in a new world of
sights and sounds now closed to us. Reasoning along the same lines of thought, many great
thinkers have held that there is no reason for doubting the possible existence of other world-
planes of being, just as real and as actual as the one upon which we live, and move, and have our
being, but which is forever invisible to the ordinary human sight 16 and senses; the apparent
nothingness of such worlds arising solely from the great difference in the rates of vibrations
between the two planes of being.

Unseen Worlds.

Listen to what careful thinkers have said concerning the possibility of entire worlds existing in
the same space occupied by us, but of which we are unconscious by reason of our failure to sense
their vibrations: One says, "All our sensations are due to the impact upon our sense-organs of
vibrations in some form. Variations in the strength and rapidity of these vibrations constitute the
difference in our perceptions. Our range of response is but a limited one. Some vibrations are too
rapid and some too slow to affect our senses, and therefore we have called to our aid various
mechanical contrivances which enable us to recognize existences which would otherwise remain
unknown. But it is still conceivable that there may be, and doubtless are, conditions of vibratory
energy that escape us, and which, if we could develop finer senses, would yield wonderful results
and extensions of our power and knowledge. Today, indeed, we are coming into contact with
forces, possibilities, and personalities which amount to a revelation of a new universe of things."

Interpenetrating Planes and Worlds.

Another says: "It is true that 'things are not what they seem'; but everything seems to be 'thus and
so' to us only because of its particular plane of being, and that plane of being is determined by its
vibrations. On one plane there 17 is a certain vibratory value or speed; on another plane, a
different one; but a plane is not a place, but a state, and so it is possible that two utterly different
planes of being might co-exist in the same place and be entirely unknown to one another. That
may seem absurd, but it is a scientific truth, and many authorities have endorsed the same."
Another says: "There may be, right here and now, passing through us and this world, some planet
invisible to us, with mountains, oceans, lakes, rivers, cities, and inhabitants: and yet we know
absolutely nothing of their existence." Another says: "Some students of the occult find it difficult
to grasp the idea of a number of manifestations, each having its own rate of vibration, occupying
the same point of space at the same time. A slight consideration of the phenomena of the
physical world would perhaps aid such persons in assimilating the concept in question. For
instance, as every student of physics knows, a single point of space may contain at the same time
vibrations of heat, light of many shades, magnetism electricity, X-Rays, etc., each manifesting its
own rate of vibration, land yet none interfering with the others."
Another says: "Every beam of sunlight contains many different colors, each with its own degree
of vibration, and yet none crowding out the others. By the use of the proper forms of laboratory
apparatus each kind of light may be separated from the others, and the ray thus split up. The
difference in colors arises simply from the different rates of etheric vibrations. Again, it is
possible to send many telegrams 18 along the same wire, at the same time, by using senders and
receivers of different vibratory keynotes. The same thing has its corresponding analogy in the
case of the wireless telegraphy. So you see, even on the physical planes we find many forms of
vibratory energy manifesting on, in, and at the same point of space at the same time, without
interfering one with the other."

Manifold Planes of Existence

The ancient occult teachings have ever insisted upon the presence of numerous planes of
existence, of which our own particular plane is but one. And all of these numerous planes are
equally within the realms of Nature; none of them being supernatural. And there is always found
to exist a correspondence between these several planes of manifestation; and, under supernormal
conditions, a certain degree of possible communication between them. Each of these planes has
numerous subdivisions and subplanes, the divisions being according to the rule of "sevens," as
follows: there are seven grand planes, and each of these are subdivided into seven secondary
planes, and each of these into seven tertiary planes, and so on until the division has been made
seven times.
The student of occultism, particularly at the beginning of his studies, experiences difficulty in
comprehending just what is meant by the term "plane" as employed in the occult teachings. His
first impression, usually encouraged by the use of the dictionary, is that each "plane" is one of a
series of strata or layers, above and below which are present other layers or strata. 19 Even after
the student progresses in his understanding of the subject, this original picture of material layers
and strata tends to persist in his thought on the subject. The error, of course, arises from his
original conception of the planes, layers, or strata as being composed of gross material matter,
whereas, as a matter of fact, only one of the many planes is so composed. When one stops to
think that even the grossest form of matter is itself composed of vibrations of energy (for science
teaches that all matter is but energy at the last); and that all other forms of material substance is
likewise so composed of vibrations of energy; then one is on the road to the discovery of the real
state of affairs. Then he begins to realize that instead of the planes of being rising one above the
other in the scale of their fineness, they are graded according to their degree of vibratory energy,
and each may actually occupy the same space as all the others. In short, the "planes" are not
strata or layers of "matter" at all, but are simply different states of vibration of energy; and that
which we know as "matter" is simply one (and a very low one) of the many forms of such
vibrations.
From the above, it is seen that the various planes of being are not distinguished by spatial
position; they do not lie one superimposed on the other, like layers or strata of matter. Instead,
they interpenetrate each other in the same limits of space. A single point of space may
accommodate the manifestations of each and all of the seven great planes of being, and all the
subdivisions, and sub-divisions (sevenfold 20 in division) at the same time. The old occultists
impressed this and other facts upon the minds of their pupils by the oft-repeated aphorism: "A
plane of being is not a place of being, but a state of being." And the "state of being" is simply
a certain manifestation of vibratory energy. With these ideas firmly fixed in the mind, the student
is less apt to wander astray from the facts of the case.

Planes and Vibrations

To those who may be disposed to regard the above statements concerning the "planes of being"
as somewhat visionary, theoretical, or imaginary, we would say: "Go to modern science, and
verify this statement." The following quotation from a writer on the subject will serve to
illustrate this fact, viz.: "We are apt to think that we are familiar with every kind of matter in
existence, but such is not the case. We are familiar with only a few forms of matter. Spectrum
analysis shows us that on certain fixed stars there are forms of matter far different from matter as
we know it on this planet. On some stars this unknown matter appears to be of a much lower
form of vibration than that manifested by terrestrial matter; while on others, there appears to be a
much higher vibratory rate than even that manifested by the most subtle forms of ultra-gaseous
matter known to us here. Even on our own globe we can distinguish between several great class
of matter. In addition to the forms called 'solid,' 'liquid,' and 'gaseous,' respectively, science now
recognizes a fourth plane of matter known as 'ultra-gaseous' matter, and there are indications
21 of several even finer states of matter, known under the general term of 'radiant matter.' In fact,
modern science sees 'radiant matter' apparently fading away into 'radiant energy.'"
In view of the facts of modern science concerning the different planes of substance, matter and
energy, it is mere stupidity that ventures to question the possibility of the existence of great plane
of being and life beyond the range of the ordinary senses of man—planes surrounding us on all
sides, occupying the same space as we do, yet unseen by us, and we largely unseen by those
dwelling upon such planes.

The Higher Senses of Men.

There are found persons who, while admitting the possibility of other and finer planes of being
and life, yet question the possibility of communication between these planes of existence. They
say, with apparently sound logic, "How is it possible for the human being, with his ordinary
senses, to 'sense' things or being, dwelling on finer planes of being?" If this were all that there is
to the question, we might well echo "How, indeed?" and agree with the critic. But, this is not all
that there is to it—not even the beginning of the end of the tale. For not only may things on the
finer planes become perceptible to human beings by means of the lowering of the vibrations of
these finer vibratory objects in certain ways, but human beings may develop and cultivate an
increased power in their senses of sight and hearing, and thus raise their vibrations so as to
"sense" the things of the higher vibrations; and, still more, human 22 beings may, and often do,
develop and cultivate certain latent powers of "sensing" which are inherent in every one of us,
and thus directly "sense" the sights and sounds of the higher planes of existence, almost if not
quite as clearly as they can sense the objects and events of their own plane of existence. To
understand how this can be, it is necessary to carefully consider the question of "sensing" in
general, so as to understand just what enables us to "sense" anything at all. Once understanding
this, it is but a step further to understand this supernormal sensing referred to. Let us then
examine this matter of "sensing" in general.

The World of Sensation.

The reports of our sense organs are called "sensations." A sensation is defined as "an impression,
or the consciousness of an impression, made upon the mind through the medium of a nerve or
one of the organs of sense. The term 'sense' is defined as 'a faculty possessed by animals of
perceiving external objects by means of impressions made upon certain organs of the body, or of
perceiving changes in the condition of the body.' Our senses have been well said to constitute 'the
doors to the outside world.' Unless our attention is specially directed to the subject, few of us
even begin to realize how completely we are dependent upon these 'doors' to the outside world"
for our knowledge of that outside world. It is only when we stop to imagine how completely shut
in, or shut out, we would be if all of our sense channels should be destroyed, that we can even
begin to realize just how dependent we are upon our senses for 23 our knowledge of the world in
which we live, and move, and have our being.

A Senseless World.

A writer on the subject has said: "Psychologists have pointed out to us the fact that if a human
being were born without sense organs, no matter how perfect a brain he might have, his life
would be little more than that of a plant. Such a person would exist merely in a dreamlike state,
with only the very faintest manifestations of consciousness. His consciousness would not be able
to react in response to the impact of sensations from the outside world, for there would be no
such impact. And as consciousness depends almost entirely upon the impact of, or resistance to,
outside impressions, his consciousness would be almost entirely inactive. He would be conscious
of his own existence, but would probably never realize the fact fully, for he would have nothing
else with which to compare himself, and his self-consciousness would never be aroused by
contact with things outside of himself. Such a person would not have even the memories of
previous sensations or experiences to arouse or heighten his consciousness or thought, and
consequently he would have no imagination to use. He would be, to all intents and purposes, a
living corpse. Helen Keller has only two doors of sensation closed to her—the sense of sight and
the sense of hearing. Touch, taste, and smell, however were left to her; and each was quickened
and heightened in order to help so far as possible to perform the world of the defective senses.
The reaching of the consciousness 24 of this girl is considered by science to be akin to a miracle
—yet only two senses were missing. To appreciate the full meaning of the importance of the
senses, one has but to think of Helen Keller as having been also deprived of the sense of touch."

The Elemental Sense.

Science informs us that all of the five senses of man, viz., the respective senses of touch, sight,
hearing, taste, and smell are but modifications of one elementary sense namely the sense of
touch; and that the other senses have been gradually evolved from that one elementary sense.
This is seen to be the case when it is realized that the only way that we "sense" the presence of an
outside object—be that object either a material substance, a vibration of the air, or an etheric
vibration of light—is by that outside object coming in contact, directly or indirectly, with one or
more of our sensory nerves, the latter conveying the report of the contact to the brain, which
translates the sensation into what is called a "perception." This is true of the sensations of touch,
sight, hearing, taste, and smell, and of senses higher than these and which as yet are not
recognized by science. Consequently, the consciousness of the presence of an outside thing
arises from contact with that outside thing through the channel of the sense of touch, or of some
of its more complex evolved phases.

The Raw Material of Thought.

From what has been said, it is seen that we can know only those things concerning the outside
world which are capable of being reported 25 to us by means of sense impressions, simple or
complex—all of our thought regarding the world is made up from "the raw materials of thought"
which psychologists have termed sensations. Consequently, if an individual is deprived of one or
more of his ordinary senses, his knowledge of the outside world is decreased to just that extent.
And, likewise, if the individual were to be given one or more additional senses, his knowledge of
the world would be increased in the same ratio. The same result, at least in a certain degree,
would be attained if the existing senses of the individual were to be increased in power so as to
register higher rates of vibration than they now consciously register and record.

The Evolution of the Senses.

This subject of increased sense-powers has always been a fascinating one for the psychologists,
and much speculation has been indulged in concerning the increased consciousness of mankind
were additional senses opened to it. We ask you to carefully consider the following quotations
from psychologists possessing the "scientific imagination."
A psychologist says: "All the senses have been evolved from the elementary sense of Touch. All
of our senses are but modified, specialized, and more complex forms of the sense of Touch. The
elementary life-forms possessed merely the sense of Touch; and that but faintly developed—but
a faint sensitiveness to outside impressions. Then developed the sense of Taste, from which later
evolved the sense of Smell, the latter even now being closely associated with 26 the former. Then
evolved the sense of Hearing, or the consciousness of the contact of air vibrations called 'sound.'
Then evolved the sense of sight, or the consciousness of contact with the light waves of the
other. And it is not impossible, or even improbable, that the human race will eventually develop
other and more complex senses—in fact, many even now claim that the development of extra
senses is now under way in the race, and that the same are now manifesting the presence and
their powers in exceptional cases."

Unfoldment of New Senses

The same writer continues as follows: "Even as it is man is able to perceive only a limited
number of sound vibrations—there are many sound vibrations above and below his scale, and
which he is unable to perceive, but which are registered by delicate instruments. Likewise, man
is able to perceive only a limited range of light vibrations, there being enormous fields of such
vibrations above and below his range. Again, man is unable to sense electrical waves, or
magnetic waves—though, theoretically, he should be able to sense these as well as light waves,
the difference between these respective fields of etheric vibrations being simply different rates of
vibration. Imagine what a new world would be opened to man if he could sense the waves of
electricity. In that case he could 'see' things as far away from him as the waves of electricity
could travel, and even though solid objects intervened, as in the case of the X-Rays. In such a
case a man might actually 'see' things at the other side of the world, by 27 means of 'wireless
electrical waves.' Theoretically these things are possible, providing that man's optical nerves are
rendered more sensitive, or provided that he evolves a new set of sensory nerves and instruments
of impression."

Discovery of New Worlds.

Another psychologist says: "If a new sense or two were added to the present normal number in
man, that which is now the phenomenal world for all of us might, for all that we know, burst into
something amazingly different and wider, in consequence of the additional revelations of these
new senses." Another authority has said: "It does not seem at all improbable that there are
properties of matter of which none of our senses can take immediate cognizance, and which
other beings might be able to see in the same manner that we are sensible to light, sound, etc."
Another writer has said: "We know that our sensory nerves are capable of transmitting to the
brain only a part of the phenomena of the universe. Our senses give us only a section of the
world's phenomena. Our senses usher only certain phenomena into the presence of our minds. If
we had three or four new senses added, this might appear like a new world to us; we might
become conscious of a vast number of phenomena which at present never have any effect upon
our nervous system. It is not possible to imagine a race of beings whose senses do not resemble
ours, inhabiting other worlds."

Transcendental Senses
Another writer has drawn an interesting picture, which is based upon a conjecture which is
28 scientifically valid, as follows: "The late Professor James once suggested as a useful exercise
for young students a consideration of the changes which would be worked in our ordinary world
if the various branches of our receiving instruments happened to exchange duties; if, for instance,
we heard all colors, and saw all sounds. All this is less mad than it seems. Music is but an
interpretation of certain vibrations undertaken by the ear; and color is but an interpretation of
other vibrations undertaken by the eye. Were such an alteration of our senses to take place, the
world would still be sending us the same messages, but we should be interpreting them
differently. Beauty would still be ours, though speaking in another tongue. The birds' song would
then strike our retina as pageant of color; we should see all the magical tones of the wind, hear as
a great fugue the repeated and harmonized greens of the forest, the cadences of stormy skies. Did
we realize how slight an adjustment of our own organs is needed to initiate us into such a world,
we should perhaps be less contemptuous of those mystics who tell us in moments of
transcendental consciousness they 'heard flowers that sounded, and saw notes that shone'; or that
they have experienced rare moments of consciousness in which the senses were fused organs is
needed to initiate us into such a world into a single and ineffable act of perception, in which
color and sound were known as aspects of the same thing."

We Sense Only Vibratory Motion.

In assimilating the strange and wonderful 29 conceptions of the psychologists above quoted,
concerning the possibility of a new world of sensation arising from the possession of new
channels of sense impression, we must never lose sight of the basic fact that all sensations result
from contact with vibratory motion. An eminent scientific authority has said regarding this:
"The only way the external world affects the nervous system is by means of vibratory motion.
Light is vibratory motion; Sound is vibratory motion; Heat is vibratory motion; Touch is
vibratory motion; Taste and Smell are vibratory motion. The world is known to us simply by
virtue of, and in relation to, the vibratory motion of its particles. Those vibratory motions are
appreciated and continued by the nervous system, and by it brought at length to the mind's
perception."

The Higher Planes of Nature

In view of the facts and principles above set forth and considered, we may begin to see that there
is nothing "unnatural" in the hypothesis that there may be reports conveyed to the consciousness
of man by means of higher vibrations than those of ordinary sound, or ordinary sight, providing
that man has either (1) highly developed his ordinary senses of sight, hearing, or touch to a
degree sufficiently high to register these higher vibrations; or else has evolved and unfolded into
consciousness certain latent faculties of sense-impression which are lying dormant in the great
masses of mankind. In fact, the thoughtful person will be forced to admit that this new
knowledge of the nature of sensations, and of its relation to vibratory motion, 30 renders
extremely probable the truth of the great body of reports of such so-called extra-conscious
knowledge which the experience of the race has furnished from the beginning of human history
down to the present time. Such a person will see that it is not a sign of "credulity" for a person to
accept such reports, so universally set forth; but that, rather, it is a sign of "credulity" for a person
to accept blindly the dogmatic assertions of the materialistic sceptics to the effect that "there is
no such thing possible in the natural world, under natural world, under natural laws—the whole
thing is delusion or else deliberate fraud." Such "know-it-all" persons are usually found to really
"know much that is not true," and to lack knowledge of much that is true, regarding Nature, her
realm and her laws.

An Appeal To Reason.

Concluding these statements, let us say that the student of this book will find nothing contained
within this book which is contrary to Nature's laws and principles. He will nowhere in it be asked
to suspend the exercise of his reason, and to accept as facts things which violate all of Nature's
laws. Instead, he will find at each point full natural explanations of even the most wonderful
phenomena; and the appeal to accept same will be made always to his reason, and not to his
blind faith or unreasoning belief. The student is urged to build his knowledge of this important
subject upon this solid rock of natural law and fact, and not upon the shifting and sinking sands
of mere dogmatic assertion and appeal to assumed authority ancient or modern.

31

PART II
Mental Vibrations and Transmissions

In the category of Nature's Finer Forces must be included that class of manifestations which are
generally known as Telepathy, Thought Transference, Thought Force, etc., all of which are based
upon the fact that there is present in all such mental states as Thought, Emotion, Desire, etc., a
certain rate of vibratory motion, which motion is capable of being radiated from the mind of the
person manifesting them in such power and force that they may be registered with more or less
distinctness upon the minds of other persons are at a greater or less distance from the first person.
In the more common forms of its manifestation, such mental force or power is known as Thought
Force, Mental Influence, etc., and in its more pronounced and less common phases it is known as
Telepathy, Thought Transference, etc., but the basic principle is precisely the same in all of such
cases, simple or complex though their manifestations may be.

The Higher Forces.

We may say here, frankly and plainly, however, that the advanced occultists regard this class of
phenomena as comparatively simple and elementary, and therefore not fully entitled to be
included in the same category with the higher phases of Nature's Finer Forces, such 32 as, for
instance, Clairvoyance, Psychometry, Communication with the Higher Planes, etc. But
notwithstanding this, we are of the opinion that any and every one of the finer forces of nature,
i.e., any of the forces which are over and above the plane upon which the ordinary senses of man,
normally developed, ordinarily function and operate, should be placed in one general category of
the Higher Forces of Nature, particularly in a work of this kind designed for the instruction of the
general public upon these important subjects. Accordingly, these lesser manifestations of the
finer forces in the natural world shall be carefully considered in this part of this book, so that the
student may become acquainted with the scientific principles upon which they are based, and
may be enabled to develop the power of manifesting such powers if he choose to do so; and that
he may understand the nature of such forces and powers when they are manifested by other
persons.

Chitta, or Mind Substance.

The Hindu Teachings hold that that which we call "Mind" is not an intangible something
different from anything else in Nature, but that, on the contrary, it forms a part of Nature's
general manifestation, and is a substantial thing. The Hindus have given to this Mind Substance
the name of Chitta. Without going into metaphysical discussion, or entering into technical details
concerning this Mind Substance or Chitta, we may say that the Hindus believe it to be one phase
of the great Manifestation 33 which we call Nature—just as that which we call Matter is another
phase of Manifestation—and, like Matter, having its own particular kind of force, or energy, its
own rates of vibrations, and its own attribute of radiating its vibratory force or energy over space.
Chitta manifests its activity in creating Thought, Emotions, etc., and also in receiving
impressions from the outside world which it translates into perceptions and ideals. Chitta, or
Mind Substance, is not regarded by the Hindus as being identical with the Soul, or the Ego; but,
on the contrary, they regard it as being an instrument for the expression of the activity of the
Ego, or Soul, just as the Body is another kind of instrument. Both Body and Mind are regarded
as being intended for the use of the Ego or Soul, and not as identical with the latter. We shall not
discuss these distinctions further in this book, this subject being apart from the general field and
scope of the present work.

What Modern Science Says.

There are many to whom this conception of the vibration energy of Chitta or Mind Substance
may seem strange. But such persons will be still more surprised, perhaps, when they are told that
modern science has practically admitted the general truth contained in the Hindu teachings
concerning the same, though modern science seems to cloak the facts of the case in technical
terms so that the ordinary person is unable to comprehend the real facts 34 dwelling beneath these
terms. To this latter class we specially commend the following statement made by Professor
Ochorowicz, the eminent European scientist, a few years ago. Professor Ochoriwicz says:

A Living Dynamic Focus.

"Every living being is a dynamic focus. A dynamic focus tends ever to propagate the motion that
is proper to it. Propagated motion becomes transformed according to the medium it traverses.
Motion always tends to propagate itself. Therefore, when we see work of any kind—mechanical,
electrical, nervic, or psychic—disappear without visible effort, then of two things, one happens,
namely, either a transmission or a transformation. Where does the first end, and where does the
second begin? In an identical medium there is only transmission; in a different medium there is
transformation.
"You send an electric current through a thick wire. You have the current, but you do not perceive
any other force. But cut that thick wire, and connect the ends by means of a fine wire, and this
fine wire will grow hot—there will be a transformation of a part of the current into heat. Take a
pretty strong current, and interpose a wire still more resistant, or a very thin carbon rod, and the
carbon will emit light. A part of the current, then, is transformed into heat and light. The light
acts in every direction around about, first visibly as light, then invisibly as heat and electric
current. Hold a magnet near it. If the magnet is weak and movable, in the form of a magnetic
needle, the beam of light will cause it to deviate; if it is strong and immovable, it will in turn
cause the beam of light to deviate. 35 And all this from a distance, without contact, without
special conductors.

Dynamic Correlate of Thought.

"A process that is at once chemical, physical and psychical, goes on in the brain. A complex
action of this kind is propagated through the gray brain matter, as waves are propagated in water.
Regarded on its physiological side, an idea is only a vibration, a vibration that is propagated, yet
which does not pass out of the medium in which it can exist as such. It is propagated only as far
as other vibrations allow. It is propagated more widely if it assumes the character which
subjectively we call emotive. But it cannot go beyond without being transformed. Nevertheless,
like force in general, it cannot remain in isolation, and it escapes in disguise.
"Thought stays at home, as the chemical action of a battery remains in the battery; it is
represented by its dynamic correlate, called in the case of the battery a 'current,' and in the case
of the brain, I know not what; but whatever its name may be, it is the dynamic correlate of
thought. I have chosen the name 'dynamic correlate.' There is something more than that; the
universe is neither dead nor void.
"A force that is transmitted meets other forces, and if it is transformed only little by little it
usually limits itself to modifying another force at its own cost, though without suffering
materially thereby. This is the case particularly with forces that are persistent, concentrated, well
seconded by their medium. It is the case with the physiological equilibrium, nervic force, psychic
force, ideas, emotions, tendencies. These modify environing forces, without 36 themselves
disappearing. They are imperceptibly transformed, and if the next man is of a nature
exceptionally well adapted to them, they gain in inductive action."

Answer to Skeptical Critics

The two most likely objections advanced against this conception by sceptical critics are as
follows: "(1) The mental vibratory motion, or vibratory waves, are not known to science, nor
recorded on scientific instruments such as the galvanometer. What is the rate of such vibrations,
and what is their general character? (2) Granted the existence of such vibratory energy, or
thought-waves, how and by means of what channel does the second person receive them from
the first person? How are they registered or recorded?" These objections are capable of being
met in a scientific manner, to the satisfaction of any fair-minded critic or investigator. We shall
now give you, briefly, the gist of the answer of science to the aforesaid objections.

The World of Vibrations

It is true that the scientific instruments of the laboratory, such as the galvanometer, do not record
thought vibrations. This, because such instruments are capable of registering and recording on
certain rates and modes of vibratory energy. Thought vibrations are registered only by their
appropriate instruments, namely, the Chitta of Mind substance of living persons. As to the
"general character and rate of vibration" of these waves of mental force, we can only say that
their general character is that of "mental force" as opposed to "physical force."
37

As to their rate of vibration, we can only say that this is not precisely known, not having as yet
been definitely ascertained; but it should be added that there is plenty room for these
vibrations in the great field of vibratory energy. Read the following paragraphs, and decide this
last matter for yourself.

Uncharted Seas of Vibration.

The following quotations from eminent scientists will serve to give the student a general idea of
the views of science upon the question of the possibility of the existence and presence of
vibratory energy of kinds and characters as yet unknown to science:
The first scientist says: "There is much food for speculation in the thought that there exists sound
waves that no human ear can hear, and color waves that no eye can see. The long, dark,
soundless space between 40,000 and 400,000,000,000,000 vibrations per second, and the infinity
of range beyond 700,000,000,000,000 vibrations per second, where light ceases, in the universe
of motion, makes it possible to indulge in speculation." The second scientist says: "There is no
gradation between the most rapid undulations or tremblings that produce our sensation of sound,
and the lowest of those which give rise to our sensations of gentlest warmth. There is a huge gap
between them, wide enough to include another world of motion, all lying between our world of
sound and our world of heat and light. And there is no good reason whatever for supposing that
matter is incapable of such intermediate activity, or that such activity may not give rise to
intermediate sensations, provided that there are organs for taking up and sensifying these
movements."
38

The third scientist says: "The knowledge we gain by experiment brings home to us what a
miserably imperfect piece of mechanism our bodies are. The ear can detect the slow-footed
sound vibrations that come to us at the rate of between 40 and 40,000 a second. But the whole of
space may be quivering and palpitating with waves at all sorts of varying speeds, and our senses
will tell us nothing of them until we get them coming to us at the inconceivable speed of
400,000,000,000,000 a second, when again we respond to them and appreciate them in the form
of light."
The fourth scientist says: "The first indications of warmth come to us when the vibrations reach
the rate of 35,000,000,000,000 per second. When the vibrations reach 450,000,000,000,000 the
lowest visible light rays manifest. Then come the orange rays, the golden yellow, the pure
yellow, the greenish yellow, the pure green, the greenish blue, the ocean blue, the cyanic blue,
the indigo, and finally the violet, the highest degree of light which the human eye can register,
and which occurs when the vibrations reach the rate of 750,000,000,000 per second. Then come
the ultra-violet rays, invisible to human sight but registered by chemical media. In this ultra-
violet region lie the X-Rays, and the other recently discovered high degree rays; also the actinic
rays which, while invisible to the eye, register on the photographic plate, sunburn one's face,
blister one's nose, and even cause violent explosions in chemical substances exposed to them, as
well as act upon the green leaves of plants, causing the chemical transformation of carbonic acid
and water into sugar and starches. These forms of 'dark light,' 39 that is, light too high in degree
to be perceived by the human eye, are but faint indications of the existence of still higher and
still finer vibrations of substance and energy."

The Human Wireless Telegraph Instrument.

Having seen that the first question of the sceptical critics is capable of being answered in the
scientific spirit, and by ideas based upon scientific investigation, we now turn to the second
question of the same critics, viz.: "Granted the existence of such vibratory energy, or thought-
waves, how and by means of what channel does the second person receive these from the first
person? How are they registered or recorded?" This same question is also implied in the
concluding sentence of one of the scientists above quoted, viz.: "There is no good reason
whatever for supposing that matter is incapable of such intermediate activity, or that such
activity may not give rise to intermediate sensations, provided that there are organs for taking up
and sensifying these movements." Let us see what science has to tell us regarding the provision
of Nature for the reception and "sensing" of this class of vibratory energy. And the easiest way to
ascertain the report of science regarding this important matter is to consider carefully what
representative leading scientists have said concerning the same in their writings or public
addresses. We call your attention to the following quotations from such sources.

A Great Scientist's Theory.

Let us begin with that great master of modern science, Sir William Crookes, the inventor of the
40 celebrated "Crookes' Tubes," without which the discovery of the X-Ray and Radio-Activity
would have been impossible. Several years ago, this eminent scientist, addressing the Royal
Society, at Bristol, England,—a gathering made up of distinguished scientists from all over the
world, most of the members being extremely sceptical concerning occult phenomena—said to
the brilliant gathering: "Were I now introducing for the first time these inquiries in the world of
science, I should choose a starting point different from that of old (where we formerly began). It
would be well to begin with Telepathy; with that fundamental law, as I believe it to be, that
thoughts and images may be transferred from one mind to another without the agency of the
recognized organs of sense—that knowledge may enter the human mind without being
communicated in any hitherto known or recognized ways. * * * If Telepathy takes place we have
two physical facts, viz., (a) the physical change in the brain of A, the transmitter, and the
analogous physical change in the brain of B, the recipient of the transmitted impression. Between
these two physical events there must exist a train of physical causes. * * * It is unscientific to call
in the aid of mysterious agencies, when with every fresh advance in knowledge it is shown that
ether vibrations have powers and attributes abundantly able to meet any demand—even the
transmission of thought.
"It is supposed by some physiologists that the essential cells of nerves do not actually touch, but
are separated by a narrow gap which widens in sleep while it narrows almost to extinction during
mental activity. This condition is so singularly like a Branly 41 or Lodge coherer [a device
which led to the discovery of wireless telegraphy] as to suggest a further analogy. The
structure of brain and nerve being similar, it is conceivable that there may be present masses of
such nerve coherers in the brain, whose special function it may be to receive impulses brought
from without, through the connecting sequence of ether waves of appropriate order of
magnitude. Roentgen has familiarized us with an order of vibrations of extreme minuteness as
compared with the smallest waves with which we have hitherto been acquainted; and there is no
reason to suppose that we have here reached the limit of frequency. It is known that the action of
thought is accompanied by certain molecular movements in the brain, and here we have physical
vibrations capable from their extreme minuteness of acting direct upon individual molecules,
while their rapidity approaches that of internal and external movements of the atoms themselves.
A formidable range of phenomena must be scientifically sifted before we effectually grasp a
faculty so strange, so bewildering, and for ages so inscrutable, as the direct action of mind upon
mind."

Human Electro-Magnetism

Professor Bain, another eminent authority, tells us: "The structure of the nervous substances, and
the experiments made upon the nerves and nerve-centres, establish beyond a doubt certain
peculiarities as belonging to the force that is exercised by the brain. This force is of a current
nature; that is to say, a power generated at one part of the structure is conveyed along an
intervening substance and discharged at some other part. The different forms 42 of electricity and
magnetism have made us familiar with this kind of action."
Professor Draper, another eminent authority, says: "I find that the cerebrum is absolutely
analogous to in construction to any other nervous arc. It is composed of centripetal and
centrifugal fibres, having also registering ganglia. If in other nervous arcs the structure is merely
automatic, and can display no phenomena of itself, but requires the influence of an external agent
—the optical apparatus inert save under the influence of light, the auditory save under the
impression of sound—the cerebrum, being precisely analogous in its elementary structure,
presupposes the existence of some agent to act through it."
Prof. M. P. Hatfield has said: "The arrangement of the nerve-envelopes is so like that of the best
constructed electrical cables that we cannot help thinking that both were constructed to conduct
something very much alike. I know that there are those who stoutly maintain that nerve force is
not electricity, and it is not in the senses that an electrical battery is not the same thing as a live
man; but, nevertheless, nerve-force is closely allied to that wonderful thing that for want of a
better and clearer understanding we agree to call 'electricity.'"

Human Etheric Force.

Professor Haddock, a popular writer along the lines of scientific psychology and kindred
subjects, in a part of his work in which he was considering the idea that thought may be
communicated by means of ether-vibrations, forcibly says: "The ether is accepted by science as a
reality, and as a 43 medium for light, heat, electricity, magnetism, etc. The nervous system is
certainly comparable to an electric battery with connecting wires. Communications of thought
and feeling without the mediation of sense-perceptions as commonly understood, is now
established. Inanimate objects exert, now and then, 'strange influences.' People certainly carry
with them a personal atmosphere. The representation of the condition of these facts by a psychic
field, compared to the magnetic or electric field, becomes, therefore, if not plausible, at least
convenient. As such a 'field' exists surrounding the sun, so may a 'field' be assumed as
surrounding each human individual. 'We have already strong grounds for believing that we live
in a medium which conveys to-and-fro movements to us from the sun, and that these movements
are electro-magnetic, and that all the transformation of light and heat, and indeed the phenomena
of life, are due to the electrical energy which comes to us across the vacuum which exists
between us and the sun—a vacuum which is pervaded by the ether, which is a fit medium for the
transmission of electro-magnetic waves.' By means, then, of a similar theory applied to mind and
brain and body, we may find reasonable explanations of many otherwise insoluble mysteries of
life, and, which is of more importance, deduce certain suggestions for the practical regulation of
life in the greatest individual interest."

The Brain-Battery.

The same writer says: "All states of body and mind involve constant molecular and chemical
change. The suggestion arises that the brain, with 44 its millions of cells and its inconceivable
changes in substance, may be regarded as a transmitting and receiving battery. The brain being a
kind of battery, and the nerves being conductors of released stored-up energy to different parts of
the body, by a kind of action similar to the actions of electricity and magnetism, it is suggested
that, either by means of the ether, or of some still finer form of matter, discharges of brain energy
may be conducted beyond the limits of the body. If the nerve-track corresponds to wires, this
refined medium may correspond to the ether-field supposed to be employed in wireless
telegraphy. As electrical movements are conducted without wires, or other visible media, so may
brain-discharges be conveyed beyond the mechanism of the battery, without the intervention of
nerves—except as they may constitute a part of the battery. Generally speaking, such discharges
would originate in two ways, viz., by direct mental action, or by mental or physical states—
perhaps by a combination."

A Peculiar Organ

So much for the conceptions of modern western science, which agree in the main with those of
the ancient oriental occultists, although of course different names and terms are employed. But,
we think it worth while to call your attention to the fact that the western scientists have failed to
note the significant presence of a peculiar organ in the human body, which is regarded as most
important in its functions and offices by the oriental teachers, and which we believe has a very
close connection to the subject just discussed by the western scientists. We refer to that strange
organ or gland known to western 45 science as the Pineal Gland. Let us see just what this is.

The Pineal Gland

The Pineal Gland is a mass of nervous substance which is found located in the human brain in a
position near the middle of the skull, almost directly above the extreme top of the spinal column.
It is shaped like a small cone, and is of a reddish-gray color. It lies in front of the cerebellum, and
is attached to the third ventricle of the brain. It contains a small quantity of peculiar particles of a
gritty, sand-like substance, which is commonly known as "brain sand." It derives its scientific
name from its shape, which resembles a pine-cone. Western physiologists are at sea regarding
the function and office of this interesting organ, or gland, and the text books generally content
themselves with stating that "the functions of the Pineal Gland are not understood." The oriental
occultists, on the other hand, claim that the Pineal Gland, with its peculiar arrangement of nerve-
cell corpuscles, and its tiny grains of "brain-sand," is intimately associated with certain forms of
the transmission and reception of waves of mental vibrations. Western students of occultism
have been struck with the remarkable resemblance between the Pineal Gland and a certain part of
the receiving apparatus employed in wireless telegraphy, the latter also containing small particles
which bear a close resemblance to the "brain-sand" of the Pineal Gland; and this fact is often
urged by them to substantiate the theory of the oriental occultists concerning the function and
office of this interesting organ of the human body which is located in the brain of man.

Transmission of Thought.

46

Many other facts set forth by modern western science could be cited in our consideration of the
question of the existence of any possible organ for the reception of thought vibrations, but it is
thought that sufficient evidence of this kind has already been submitted to your attention—
sufficient to remove any reasonable doubts, and to give the student at least a clear and open mind
on the subject. Summing up such evidence, we may say that modern science is fast approaching
the position which is so well expressed by Camille Flammarion, the eminent French scientist, as
follows: "The action of one mind upon another at a distance—the transmission of thought,
mental suggestion, communication at a distance—all these are not more extraordinary than the
action of the magnet on iron, the influence of the moon on the sea, the transportation of the
human voice by electricity, the revolution of the chemical constituents of a star by the analysis of
its light, or, indeed, all the wonders of contemporary science. Only these psychic
communications are of a more elevated kind, and may serve to put us on the track of a
knowledge of human nature. What is certain is this: That Telepathy can and ought to be
henceforth considered by Science as an incontestible reality; that minds are able to act upon each
other without the intervention of the senses; that psychic force exists, though its nature is yet
unknown."

A General Principle.

At this point we wish to impress upon the minds of the students of this book that what has been
above 47 said regarding that class of mental communications generally classed under the head of
Telepathy also applies to many much higher phases of occult phenomena and psychic
manifestations. In fact, this is one of the reasons why we have paid such close attention to the
scientific evidence substantiating this class of phenomena. It is not too much to say that in what
has been said in the foregoing pages there is to be found a scientific basis for the phenomenon of
"spirit communication," at least in many of its phases. It is but a step in thought—and a natural
and easy step at that—from the matter of the communication of thought from the mind of one
person or the material plane of life to another person on the same plane, on to the matter of the
communication of thought from the mind of an individual entity on a higher plane of life to a
second person who is abiding on the lower material plane occupied by us at this stage of our
existence. It is seen that the difference consists largely in the matter of the degree and rate of
vibratory energy employed, and the preparation of a proper receiving instrument for the
reception and translation of such messages. This phase of the subject will be considered in fuller
detail in a subsequent portion of this book.

Transformation of Vibrations.

One of the things which seem to greatly puzzle the average student of the subject of mental
vibrations, and thought-transference, is that which may be called "thought waves." The student is
unable to conceive of a wave of "thought" being projected into the air, and then traveling along
until it reaches 48 the mind of other persons. The difficulty, upon analysis, is seen to consist of
the inability to conceive of "thought" as being a material substance capable of traveling in
"waves." It is no wonder that the student finds this conception difficult, for there is no such thing
as "thought" traveling in this way. The phenomenon of thought transference is accounted for
scientifically in quite another manner, as we shall see in a moment. The student is advised to
carefully note this distinction, for upon its understanding depends greatly the intelligent
comprehension of the entire subject of thought vibrations and thought-transference.

Example of Electric Light

Perhaps this matter may be best explained by means of illustrations of the operation of electricity
and light—electric vibrations and light vibrations. In both cases the secret of the transmission of
the vibrations or waves of vibratory energy may be summed up in the word "transformation."
For instance: When we transmit electric vibrations over a fine wire or thread of carbon, the
electric vibrations are transformed into light vibrations and manifest as "electric light." In
another form of transmission the electric vibrations are transformed into "electric heat." But this
is merely one phase of the transformation; consider carefully the more complex phases, as
follows: We speak into the receiver of a telephone and the sound vibrations produced by our
voice are transformed into electrical vibrations and in that form travel over the telephone wire;
arriving at the other end of the wire, these electric vibrations enter into the receiver, and are there
49 transformed into sound vibrations, and as such are heard by the person holding the receiver.
Now note this: the sound vibrations do not travel at all; instead, they are transformed into electric
waves, which in turn are transformed at the receiving end of the line into sound vibrations once
more. And unless the receiving apparatus be present, and properly adjusted, there is no second
transformation at all; and in such case the electric vibrations remain such.

Example of Wireless Telegraphy.

Likewise, in the case of the wireless telegraphy, the electric energy produced by the sending
instrument is transformed into subtle and finer etheric waves, which travel to the receiving
instrument, and are there transformed into electric waves, the latter producing physical changes
in the receiving apparatus which enable them to be read by the observer. In the case of wireless
telephony there is still more complex process of transformation, as follows: the speaker conveys
sound vibrations into the instrument; these are transformed into electric vibrations; and the latter
into the etheric vibrations which travel through space to the receiver. Reaching the receiver, the
etheric vibrations are transformed into ordinary electric vibrations, and these in turn into sound
waves capable of being sensed by the listener.

Example of Light Waves.

The same process is detected in the transmission of what we call light waves. The activities
manifested by the substance of the sun set up certain vibrations which we call "light vibrations."
These 50 are communicated to the ether in the form of so-called "light waves" but which are
merely etheric waves of a certain rate of vibration. These waves travel through space and are
transformed into "light" only when they reach some material substance capable of receiving and
reflecting their vibrations. Science tells us that empty space is perfectly dark, and that light
manifests only when the etheric light vibrations come in contact with material substance and are
there transformed into "light." Light, as "light" does not travel from the sun—what we know as
"light" is simply the result of the transformation of certain etheric waves into "light" by reason of
their contact with material substances.

Transformation of Mental Vibrations

Now for the analogy. Mental vibrations are so only when they remain in their own uninterrupted
medium of channel of activity, i.e., the brain and the nervous system of the individual. Many
hold that they are able to leap over the barrier of flesh separating two persons when such persons
are in immediate physical contact, and the conditions are of a certain kind; but as a rule they do
not do so. But, as all investigators know, mental vibrations are capable of being transformed into
some subtle form of etheric vibrations, and the latter when coming in contact with the nervous
system of other persons may be again transformed, this time into mental vibrations which
produced thoughts, feelings and mental images in the minds of the second persons or persons,
corresponding with these mental states in the first person. Think over this carefully, until you
grasp the idea fully.

Vibrational Attunement

51

And here we find another startling correspondence between the phenomena of wireless
telegraphy and that of thought transference or transmission of mental vibrations. We allude to the
fact that while a wireless telegraphic sending instrument may be sending forth vibrations of the
strongest power, its messages are capable of being received or "picked up" only by those
instruments which are "in tune" with the sending instrument to at least a certain degree; to all
other instruments, those which are not "in tune" with the sending instrument, there is no message
perceptible. Precisely this same state of affairs is found to prevail in the realm of mental
vibrations and thought transmission. The individual receives only such messages as emanate
from instruments with which he is "in tune"—to all the rest he is deaf and unconscious. But once
"in tune" with the higher vibrations of the mental realm, he will receive every message traveling
on that particular plane at that particular time, unless he deliberately shut them out. We shall see
how this works out in ordinary life, when we consider the general subject of Telepathy and
Thought Transference in the succeeding Chapter.
 In Tune With Higher Planes

But, in connection with the above statement of the "in tune" law or rule of manifestation, we
wish to call to the attention of the student the important fact that the same law prevails in the
case of communications from the higher planes of existence—the so-called "spirit
communications" and other messages of this kind reaching individuals on our 52 own plane of
existence. It is only when the individual on the "earth plane" becomes "in tune" with the sending
mental instrument of the entity abiding on a higher plane of existence, that it is able to "pick up"
the message being sent to earth. Even the same individual is often unable to "catch" the messages
at one time, while at other times he experiences no difficulty whatsoever. An understanding of
this fact—this law or rule of manifestation—will throw a great light over many dark places of
misunderstanding and perplexity concerning certain phases of occult and psychic phenomena.
This feature of such phenomena will be considered in detail in subsequent parts of this book.

The Two Key-Words.

Concluding our consideration of the "just how" of the transmission of thoughts, messages, and
"psychograms" between two minds, be they both on earth plane, or one of the two on the higher
planes, we would say: "Always remember the two Key-Words, namely Transformation and
Attunement." These two Key-Words will enable you to unlock many doors of thought on these
subjects—doors which otherwise will remain closed to you.

53

PART III
THOUGHT TRANSFERENCE

The most elementary and simple form in which mental vibrations are transmitted is that which
may be called Thought Transference. In the category of Thought Transference may be included
two quite general classes, as follows: (1) Involuntary Transmission of Mental Vibrations, and (2)
Voluntary Transmission of Mental Vibrations, commonly known as Telepathy. In this part of
this book both of these general classes of Thought Transference shall be considered in some
detail.

Involuntary Transmission of Mental Vibrations.

Mental vibrations emanating from the brain of the individual take on the form of wave-like
movements in the ether, which are accordingly known as "thought-waves." These thought-waves
are constantly being sent forth from the brains of all persons, and after being sent forth they
spread in space from the immediate neighborhood of the person originating them, to a distance
proportioned to the strength and power energizing the original mental state. These thought-waves
have the power of awakening and arousing into activity corresponding 54 mental states in other
persons coming within their field of force, according to the laws of Mental Induction. It should
be noted here that the activity aroused in the mind of the receiving person is accomplished by the
setting into vibratory motion the Chitta or Mind-substance of that person, just as the receiving
diaphragm of the telephone is set vibrating at the same rate as that of the sending instrument, and
thus the original sound-waves are reproduced.

Thought Waves

Thought-waves are manifested in various forms, modes, and phases, and in different degrees of
power. Some are emanated without any clearly defined desire or intent to accomplish certain
ends, while others are charged with strong desire focused to a definite point by clear-cut ideas of
ends sought to be accomplished. The latter, however, are usually entitled to be classed among the
"involuntary" phases of Thought Transference, because the senders are generally unaware that
thought-waves have an actual effect upon the minds of other persons; their thoughts and mental
states arising in accordance with their feelings, desires, and general aims. Where the individual
has learned that thought is an active power, he may deliberately send forth his thought-waves
directed toward the person or persons whom he wishes to affect and influence.
The student must remember, however, that there is a great difference in the power and effective
activity between thought-waves sent forth under different circumstances. Some are sent forth
idly, and with no focused power or energy of desire and feeling, and 55 such naturally are weak
in effect upon others. Others are sent forth vitalized with strong desire and feeling, and focused
with a clear ideal and mental picture, and, consequently, exert a far greater degree of effect upon
the minds of others with whom they come in contact. The analogy of the waves of electricity
holds good here, for just as the electric power may be strong or weak, as the case may be, so may
the mental force be strong or weak under different circumstances, and in different individuals.

Vibratory Thought Force

The vibratory force of thought-waves persist for some time after their original emanation. Here,
also we have analogies on the physical plane, as follows: The heat of a room continues for some
time after the fire which originally caused it has ceased to burn. Likewise, the air of a room may
manifest the perfume of a flower, or extract, long after the latter has been removed from the
room. Again, rays of light persist in existence long after the star manifesting them has been
blotted out of existence. In the same way thought-vibrations continue to manifest in a place,
large or small though its space may be, long after the original sender has passed from that plane
—perhaps even long after he has passed from earth life.

Mental Atmospheres

A well known American writer on this subject has said concerning this point: "There are many
places today filled with the thought-vibrations of minds long since passed out of the body. There
are places filled with the strong vibrations of tragedies long since enacted there. Every place has
a 56 mental atmosphere of its own, the same arising from the thought-vibrations set in motion by
the various persons who have inhabited or occupied them. Every city has its own mental
atmosphere which has its effect upon persons moving into them. Some are lively, some dull,
some progressive, some old-fogyish, some moral, some immoral—the result of the character of
the early settlers and leading spirits, of the place in question. Persons moving into these towns
are affected by the mental atmospheres thereof, and either sink to the general level, or else, if
strong enough, help to change the mental tone of the place. Sometimes a change in conditions
bring a large influx of new people, to a town, and the mental waves of the newcomers tend to
bring about a marked change in the local mental atmosphere. These facts have been noticed by
many observing people who often have not been familiar with the principles underlying and
producing the facts which the observers have so clearly discerned."

The Contagion of Thought.

The same writer says, along the same general lines: "Many have of course noticed the differing
mental atmospheres of stores, offices, and other places of business. Some of such places give one
an air of confidence and trust; others create a feeling of suspicion and distrust; some convey an
impression of active, wideawake management, while others impress one as being behind the
times, and suffering from a want of alert, active management. These differing mental
atmospheres are caused by the different prevailing mental attitudes of the owners of the
respective establishments. The managers of business places send forth thought-waves 57 of their
own, and their employees naturally falling into the pace set for them also send forth similar
vibrations, and before long the whole place is vibrating on a certain scale. A change of
management soon produces a marked change in the entire mental atmosphere of the place. In the
same way, we notice the mental atmospheres of the houses we happen to visit; in this way we
become conscious of an entire mental scale of many notes, the notes being sounded
unconsciously by the minds of the occupants of the houses. From some thresholds radiate
harmony, while others breathe the spirit of inharmony. Some radiate emotional warmth, while
others chill one like an iceberg, by reason of the emotional coldness of the dwellers therein.
Likewise, the low quarters of our cities, the dens of vice, and the haunts of dissipation vibrate
with the character of the thought and feeling of those inhabiting them. And, often, the weak-
willed visitor is thus tempted. In the same way, certain other places are charged with the
vibrations of strong, helpful, elevating mental states, which tend to lift up and elevate, energize
and stimulate the minds and feelings of those visiting these places. Thought and feeling are
contagious, by reason of the laws of mental vibration and mental induction."

Mental Whirlpools.

The contagion of thought-vibrations is manifested by such vibrations coming into contact with
the minds of other persons within the field of mental induction of the first person, and there
setting up similar vibrations. We know that orators, actors, preachers and others addressing
audiences of persons, 58 send forth strong mental currents which tend to awaken corresponding
vibrations in the minds of their hearers. We weep, smile, grow angry, feel happy, according to
the character of the thought-waves, of the person on the platform or the stage, providing that we
accept the same. And, according to the same principle, persons scattered over large areas are
influenced and affected in the same way by whirlpools of mental vibrations set into original
motion by some strong, masterful public man. A writer has said concerning this point:

Mental Tidal Waves

"We know how great waves of feeling spread over a town, city, or county, sweeping people off
their feet, and causing them to lose their balance. Great waves of political enthusiasm, or war-
spirit or prejudice for or against certain people, or groups of people, sweep over places and cause
men to act in a manner which they afterward often regret when they come to themselves and
consider the matter in the light of cold reason. People are swayed by demagogues or magnetic
leaders who wish to capture their votes or patronage; and they are often led into acts of mob
violence, or similar atrocities, by yielding to these waves of contagious thought. On the other
hand, we know equally well how great waves of religious emotion spread out over the
community upon the occasion of some great 'revival' excitement or religious fervor."

Immunity to Thought Influences

Persons becoming acquainted for the first time with the above recited facts of mental vibrations,
59 mental currents, mental waves, and mental contagion, frequently raise the objection that if all
this be true, why are we not constantly swept off of our feet by these great waves of mental
vibrations, whereas, in fact, we are seldom or never aware of them? The question is a natural
one, and is capable of a satisfactory answer. In the first place, many of these mental currents
neutralize each other, and thus both cease to exert any marked effect. And again, most persons
are really "immune" to most of the thought waves reaching them, this by reason of the protective
resistive power bestowed by Nature, and acquired during the evolution of the race.
To understand this, we have but to think of our immunity to the great majority of sounds and
sights on the streets of a busy city. On a busy street corner, we are assailed by an infinitude of
sounds and sights—but we hear but few of these, and see still fewer. The rest of these
impressions are lost to us, although we have ears to hear and eyes to see. We hear and see only
those impressions which are strong enough to awaken our attention. In the same way we fail to
perceive the numerous thought vibrations and mental currents constantly surrounding us, and our
attention is attracted and awakened by those sufficiently strong and vigorous to awaken our
attention. The analogy is a very close one, and the understanding of one set of phenomena gives
us the key to the other.

Mental Attunement

It should not fail to be noticed, moreover, that we habitually receive and accept more readily
those thought vibrations which are in harmony with our 60 own average habitual mental states;
and, according to the same general principle, we tend to habitually reject and fail to receive those
vibrations which are inharmonious to us for the same reason. Here, you will notice, we have an
illustration of the principle of "attunement" which, as we have informed you, is operative on the
plane of thought and mental vibrations as well as on that of wireless telegraphy. Just as it is a
psychological fact that we tend to see and to hear those things which are in harmony with our
beliefs and opinions, and our interest, so is it a metaphysical fact that we tend to accept and
absorb the mental vibrations which are in harmony with our opinions, beliefs, and interest, and to
reject those which are opposed thereto.
Moreover, the person who acquaints himself with the law of mental vibrations and thought-
transference acquires a practical knowledge which enables him to render himself immune to
objectionable and undesirable mental currents or thought-waves. We are not necessarily open to
the influence of every stray current of thought or feeling that happens to be in our immediate
vicinity. Instead, by the proper methods, consciously or unconsciously practiced and manifested,
we may, and often do, insulate ourselves so that these undesirable mental influences fail utterly
to affect us; and, likewise, we may actually attract to ourselves the desirable mental currents.
These principles and methods will be given later in this part of this book; they are mentioned
here merely to acquaint you with the fact that they are existent and known to those familiar with
this subject.

Voluntary Transmission of Mental Vibrations.

61

Under the head of Voluntary Transmission of Mental Vibrations may be placed the following
two general classes of phenomena, viz., (1) Voluntary Efforts to Exert Mental Influence upon
Others; and (2) Voluntary Efforts to Produce the Phenomena of Telepathy, along Scientific
Lines. Each of these general classes of phenomena will now be presented for your inspection and
consideration.

Voluntary Mental Influence.

Under the category of Voluntary Mental Influence we find much of the phenomena formerly
classed as "Magic"—and by this we mean both White Magic, or efforts to produce results
beneficial to the person influenced, and Black Magic, or efforts to produce results beneficial to
the person exerting the influence, and often to the positive detriment of the person influenced.
White Magic. Under the category of White Magic may be placed all those efforts of mental
healing, and similar phases of metaphysical therapeutics; and the accompanying efforts directed
toward the general happiness and welfare of the person "treated." The word "treatment" has
sprung into use in this connection, in America and Europe, by reason of its employment by the
numerous metaphysical cults and schools flourishing there. We hear on all hands of persons
being "treated" for Health, Happiness, and Prosperity in this way. While in some cases, the
"magic" is worked on higher planes than those of thought-vibrations, it is nevertheless true that
in most instances the entire process is that of mental induction, along the lines 62 described in the
preceding pages of this book. In such cases the person influenced opens himself to the helpful
thought of the person "treating" him, and thus a co-operation and mental "team work" is secured,
often with the most beneficial results. This phase of the subject is too well known to require
lengthy consideration in this book, and is more properly the subject of the many books devoted
to this special phase of mental power.

Black Magic. It has well been said that there are always two poles to everything in Nature, and
continued experience and investigation seems to substantiate this statement. Whenever we find a
force or power producing beneficial results, we may usually feel assured that the same force or
power, turned in another direction, or possibly reversed in its action, will produce results of an
opposite character. And so it is with this subject of "Magic" which we are now considering.
While we would be very glad to pass over this phase of the subject, truth and duty to our readers
compel us to state that White Magic has its opposite pole—that opposite pole known as Black
Magic, or the use of psychic force for selfish and unworthy ends. There is no use trying to pursue
the ostrich policy regarding these things—it is always better to face them boldly, and then to take
means to avoid the evil contained in them.

We prefer to quote from other writers on this subject, who have given this particular matter the
most careful attention and investigation, and who have set forth simply and plainly the result of
their investigations and discoveries. Here follow several quotations from authorities of this kind:

Base Use of Mind Power

63

One writer says: "It is a fact known to all students of occultism that Black Magic has been
frequently employed in all times to further the selfish, base ends of some people. And it is also
known to advanced thinkers today that even in this enlightened age there are many who do not
scruple to stoop to the use of this hateful practice in order to serve their own ends,
notwithstanding the punishment that all true occultists know awaits such persons. The annals of
history are full of records of various forms of witchcraft, conjuration, and similar forms of Black
Magic. All the much talked of practice of 'putting spells' upon people are really forms of Black
Magic, heightened by the fear and superstition of those affected. One has but to read the history
of witchcraft to see that there was undoubtedly some force at work behind all of the appalling
superstitions and ignorance shown by the people of those times. What they attributed to the
influence of people 'in league with the devil' really arose from the use of Black Magic, or an
unworthy use of Mental Influence, the two things being one at the last.

The Secret of Witchcraft

"An examination of the methods employed by these 'witches,' as shown by their confessions,
give us a key to the mystery. These 'witches' would fix their minds upon other people, or their
animals, and by holding a concentrated mental picture there, would send forth thought-waves
affecting the welfare of the persons being 'adversely treated,' which would influence and disturb
them, and often bring 64 on sicknesses. Of course, the effect of those 'treatments' were greatly
heightened by the extreme fear and superstition held by the masses of people at the time, for fear
is ever a weakening factor in mental influence, and the superstitions and credulity of the people
caused their minds to vibrate in such a manner as to render them extremely passive to the
adverse influences being directed against them. It is well known that the Voodoos of Africa, and
similar cults among other savage races, practice Black Magic among their people with great
effect. Among the native of Hawaii there are certain men known as 'Kahunas' who pray people
sick, or well, whichever way they are paid to do. These instances could be multiplied almost
indefinitely, but the basic principle is ever the same in such cases.

Modern Black Magic.

"In our own civilized lands there are many people who have learned the principles of mental
influence, and who are using the same for unworthy purposes, seeking to injure others and to
defeat their undertakings, or else trying to bring them around to their own (the treators') point of
view and inclinations. The modern revival of occult knowledge has operated along two lines, and
in opposite directions. On the one hand, we see and hear of the mighty power for good that
mental influence is exerting over the race today, raising up the sick, strengthening the weak,
putting courage into the despondent, and transforming failures into successes. But, on the other
hand, the hateful selfishness and greed of unprincipled persons is taking advantage of this mighty
force of nature, and prostituting 65 it to the hateful ends of such persons, without heed to the
dictates of conscience or the teaching of religion or of ordinary morality. These people are
sowing a baleful wind, which will result in their reaping a frightful whirlwind on the mental
plane. They are bringing down upon themselves pain and misery in the future."

The Explanation of Sorcery.

Another writer says: "In various stages of history we find the records of persons having been
affected by the influences of witches, sorcerers, and other evil-minded, unprincipled persons. In
most cases these so-called witches and sorcerers themselves were under the delusion that they
were being assisted by the devil or some other supernatural being. They did not realize that they
were simply using natural forces. Studying the history of witchcraft, sorcery, black magic, and
the like, you will find that the devotees thereof usually employed some psychometric method. In
other cases they would mould little figures of clay, or of wax, in the general shape and
appearance of the person whom they wished to affect. It was thought that these little figures were
endowed with some supernatural powers or attributes, but of course this was mere superstition.
The whole power of the little figures arose from the fact that they aided the imagination of the
spell-worker in forming a mental image of the person sought to be influenced; and thus
established a strong mental rapport condition. Added to this, you must remember that the fear
and belief of the public greatly aided the spell-worker, and increased his power and influence
over these poor persons."

The Power of Fearthought.

66

The last-named writer explains the reference to "fear and belief" in the last sentence above
quoted by the following very important statements, and these we ask every student of this book
to firmly impress upon his mind, for a mighty truth is therein conveyed. The statements in
question are as follows:
"Your attention is hereby called to a very important psychic principle involved in the
manifestation of that class of phenomena in which is embraced the cases of witchcraft, sorcery,
etc., with which the pages of history are filled. It is a well established fact that by denying the
psychic power over you exerted by any person whatsoever, you practically neutralize the psychic
power of such person, at least so far as its effect upon and power over yourself is concerned. The
stronger and more positive is your mental attitude of immunity to such power, and your assertion
and affirmation of that immunity, the greater is your own power of psychic resistance, and the
less does his possible power over you become. The average person, not knowing this, is more or
less passive to psychic influences of other persons, and may be affected by them to a greater or
less extent, the degree depending upon the psychic development of the person seeking to
influence him.

The Negative Pole.

"At the extreme negative pole of susceptibility we find persons who believe firmly that other
persons have psychic power over them, and who are consequently more or less afraid of such
persons 67 and of their influence. This belief and fear operates in the direction of making such
persons peculiarly sensitive and impressionable to such influence, and thus easily affected by
psychic induction. This is the reason that the so-called witches and sorcerers and others of evil
repute have been often able to acquire such a power over their victims, and to cause them so
much trouble. The secret is that the victims believed in the power of the other persons, and
feared their power. The greater the belief in, and fear of, the power of the other persons, the
greater the susceptibility to their influence; the greater the disbelief in such power, and the firm
belief in one's own power of immunity and that of neutralizing the effect of the psychic influence
of other persons, the less is one's degree of susceptibility, and the greater is one's degree of
immunity and power. This is the rule in the case—keep it in mind!

Voodooism Explained.

"Among the negroes of the South, in America, and among the Hawaiians, we find marked
instances of this kind. The negro Voodoo men and women work Black Magic on those of their
race who are superstitious and credulous, and who have a mortal fear of the Voodoo. Travelers
who have visited the countries in which there is a large negro population have many interesting
tales to recite of the terrible workings of these Voodoo black magicians. In some cases, sickness
and even death is the result. But, mark you this! It is only those who believe in, and fear, the
power of the Voodoos that are so affected. In Hawaii, the Kahunas or native magicians are
renowned for their power to cause 68 sickness and death to those who have offended them; or to
those who have offended some client of the Kahuna, and who have hired the latter to 'pray' the
enemy to sickness or death. The poor, ignorant Hawaiians, believing implicitly in the power of
the Kahunas, and being in deadly fear of them, are very susceptible to their psychic influence,
and naturally fall easy victims to their vile arts, unless they buy off the Kahuna, or make peace
with his client. White persons living in Hawaii are not affected by the Kahunas, for they do not
believe in them, neither do they fear them. Unconsciously, but yet strongly, they 'deny' the
power, and are immune. So you see the principle working out here, too. Once you have the
master-key, you may unlock many doors of mystery which have heretofore been closed to you."

Self-Protection.

The following quotations from writers on this special subject contain detailed directions for the
use of those who may have reason to believe that some other person or persons are trying to use
psychic force, or mental currents, upon them for selfish purposes, or otherwise. Of course the
general mental attitude of disbelief, and assertion of one's one immunity is sufficient for the
purposes of general psychic protection; but we have thought it proper to include the following
special directions given by those who have made a close study of this subject.
One writer says: "When you come in contact with people who are seeking to influence you by
psychic methods, either direct or indirect, you will find yourself able to defy their mental attacks
by 69 simply remembering the strength immanent in your Ego, or Spirit, aided by the statement
or affirmation (made silently to yourself) 'I am an Immortal Spirit, using the power of my Ego,
which renders me immune from all base psychic attacks or power.' With this mental attitude you
may make powerful even the slightest mental effort in the direction of sending forth your own
mental vibrations, and these will scatter the adverse influences in all directions; it will often be
found that the other person will show signs of confusion in such a case, and will seek to get away
from your presence. With this consciousness held in mind, your mental command to another, 'Let
me alone—I cast off your influence by the power of my Spirit,' will operate so strongly that you
will often actually see the effect at once. If the other person be stubborn, and determined to
influence you by words of suggestion, coaxing, threatening, or similar methods, look him or her
straight in the eye, saying mentally: 'I defy you—my inner power casts off your influence.' Try
this the next time that any one attempts to influence you either verbally or by means of thought-
waves, and see how strong and positive you will feel, and how the efforts of the other person will
fail. This sounds simple, but the little secret is worth thousands of dollars to every individual
who will put it into practice."

Repelling Adverse Influences.

This writer continues: "Not only in the case of personal influence in the actual presence of the
other person may be defeated in this way, but the same method will act equally well in the matter
of repelling 70 the mental influence of others directed against you in the form of 'absent
treatments,' etc. If you feel yourself inclining toward doing something which in your heart you
feel is not to your best interests, judged from a true viewpoint, you may know that, consciously
or unconsciously, someone is seeking in influence you in this way. Then smile to yourself, and
make the statements mentioned above, or some similar one, and holding the power of the Spirit
within your soul, send forth a mental command just as you would in case the person were
actually before you in person. You may also deny out of existence the influencing power, by
asserting mentally: 'I deny your power to influence me; you have no such power over me; I am
resting securely upon the Spirit within me; I deny out of existence any power over me asserted
by you.' After repelling these absent influences you will at once experience a feeling of relief and
strength, and will be able to smile at the thought of any such adverse influence affecting you in
the slightest."

Neutralizing Psychic Influences.

Another writer gives us the following most interesting information and advice for use in cases of
this kind: "I wish to point out to you a means of protection against the use of psychic influence
against yourself on the part of unscrupulous persons, or any other persons whomsoever, for that
matter. One is fully justified in employing this method of protection against even the meddling
influence of other persons, who are trying to influence you without your permission or consent.
The following is the method of self-protection or defense 71 against this class of psychic
influence: In the first place, you must, of course, refuse to admit to your mind any feeling of fear
regarding the influence of other persons, for such fear opens the door to their influence, as all
students of this subject know. If you have been, or are fearful of the psychic influence of any
person, you must get to work and drive out that feeling by positive and vigorous denials. The
denial, as all students know, is the positive neutralizer of the psychic influence of another
person, providing you make it in full belief in its truth. You must take the mental position (which
is really the true one) that you are absolutely immune to the psychic attack or influence. You
should say, mentally, 'deny to any person the power to influence me psychically without my
consent; I am positive to all such influences, and they are negative to me; I neutralize all such
influences by this positive denial!' It should encourage you to know that it requires far less force
and power to repel and neutralize psychic influences of this kind, than is required to send forth
the power; an ounce of denial and protection overcomes a pound of psychic attacking power.
Nature gives you the means of protection, and gives you the 'best end of the stick'; and it is your
own fault if you do not use it effectively. A word to the wise is sufficient."

Telepathic Phenomena.

The second general class of phenomena in the general category of Voluntary Transmission of
Mental Vibrations is that known as "Telepathic Phenomena." In a sense, of course, all phases of
Thought Transmission, and particularly that of 72 Voluntary Thought Transmission, may be
considered as forms of Telepathy; but for the purpose of classification and distinction we have in
this book classed as Telepathic Phenomena merely those forms and phases of Thought
Transference in which there is an agreement between the telepathic sender and the telepathic
receiver, and in which the experiments are conducted more or less along the lines of scientific
investigation.

Scientific Investigators.

Scientific observers, for a number of years past, have been conducting careful series of
experiments in Telepathy, and many volumes of the reports of such investigations have been
published by various psychic research societies. Among the eminent scientists who have devoted
much attention to this subject are the following: Professor Henry Sidgewick, of Cambridge
University; Professor Balfour Stewart, of the Royal Society of England; Rt. Hon. A. J. Balfour,
the eminent English statesman and scientist; Professor William James, the eminent American
psychologist; Sir William Crookes, the great English chemist, physicist, who invented the
celebrated "Crookes' Tubes," without which the discovery of the X-Rays, Radio Activity, etc.,
would have been impossible; Frederick W. H. Myers, the celebrated investigator of Psychic
Phenomena; and Sir Oliver Lodge, the eminent English scientist. All these men are of the highest
international standing and reputation, and their acceptance of the phenomena of Telepathy places
the same on a firm scientific basis.

How Experiments Are Conducted.

73

The scientific experiments involving Telepathy, which have been conducted by numerous
societies for psychical research and other bodies, have ranged from quite simple tests to those
very complex. In all of these experiments there has been one person called the "sender," and
another called the "receiver"—or names corresponding to these. The sender fixes in his mind a
strong impression of the name or picture to be transmitted, and then makes a positive effort of
the will to transmit the same to the receiver. The receiver assumes a passive receptive mental
attitude, and then reports the word or image that comes into his mind. The more complex tests
embody these same simple features.
Some of the early reports of the Society for Psychical Research, of London, England, show
results most amazing to those who have not made a personal investigation of these matters. In
some of the tests, the receiver correctly reported seventeen cards in succession, the said cards
having been shown the sender, but kept out of sight of the receiver, and no possible
communication between the two being allowed. In tests of naming small objects held by the
sender, the receiver correctly named five out of six. In one complicated test, in which various
objects, names, etc., were transmitted, the report shows a successful report of 202 out of a
possible 382. Such results, of course, took the results entirely out of the operation of the law of
averages. Other successful experiments showed a high percentage of results obtained from the
reproduction by the sender of geometrical and other figures and designs exhibited to the sender.

Private Experiments.

74

But, after all, the most convincing evidences of Telepathy are those which most of us have met
with in our own experience. There are but few intelligent, observing persons who have not, at
some time in their life, had experiences of this kind, in which the thoughts of others were
perceived plainly by themselves. Many persons have established such a close rapport condition
between themselves and friends or relatives that instances of remarkable thought-transmission
between them are quite common and ordinary.

Development of Telepathic Power.

Practically every person may develop a certain degree of telepathic power, sending, receiving, or
both, by means of a moderate amount of regular and earnest practice and experiments. In
developing sending power, the person should cultivate concentration, and the use of the will in
the direction of projecting mental states; in the case of the desired development of the receiving
power, the person should develop receptiveness and passivity, and a certain recognition of an
actual telepathic impulse which is impossible to describe in words but which comes to every
investigator, and which when once experienced is always recognized thereafter.

"Mind Reading."

Perhaps the best plan for the beginner is to practice the popular "mind reading" experiment or
game, which is quite popular in some localities, and among persons interested in this line of
thought. The experiments of this kind are performed, generally, 75 about as follows: The receiver
leaves the room, and during his or her absence the company in the room select some object, large
or small, such as a chair or a small penknife, etc., and the same is shown and named to the
sender. Then the receiver is called back into the room for the experiment, and is blindfolded
securely. Then the receiver takes the right hand of the sender and places it in his (the receiver's)
left hand, holding it firmly there. The sender then concentrates his mind upon the object to be
"found," and mentally wills that the receiver move toward it. The receiver then experiences a
peculiar faint impulse in the direction of the object, and accordingly moves toward it. After
considerable practice, the receiver acquires the faculty of not only finding large objects, but also
is able to locate small objects, such as concealed rings, pins, etc.

Development Practices.

This class of experiments, while open to the objection that there may be more or less muscular
direction consciously or unconsciously given by the sender, nevertheless tend to develop
proficiency in both sender and receiver. In fact, such experiments are perhaps one of the very
best methods of developing projecting or receiving power along the lines of occult or psychic
forces. This because the persons become familiar with the psychic processes involved, and their
efficiency becomes increased by practice and experiment. This plan is like that of teaching a
child how to walk by means of holding its hand, allowing it to rest on chairs, etc. In practicing
such experiments, the receiver will soon 76 become conscious of receiving the thought message
in what may be called a "wireless flash," instead of by the slower, and less clear process of
transmission through the physical body of the sender, and thence through his own nerves. When
the sender begins to experience these flashes of consciousness, he is ready to proceed to the next
stage.

The "Willing Game."

The second stage on telepathic development is much akin to that just described, with the
difference that there is no physical contact between the sender and the receiver—no holding of
hands, etc. A variation of this is found in the familiar "willing game" in which the whole roomful
of persons concentrates upon the receiver, and "wills" that he find a selected object. On the
whole, however, the private experiments conducted by the sender and the receiver, with perhaps
a few intelligent and sympathetic spectators, are far better than the "willing game" plan, in which
there are usually many triflers present ready to make a joke of the whole thing, and thus taking
away that true concentration under which the best results may be obtained.

Formal Tests.

The third step in telepathic development is that of conducting experiments similar to those
originally conducted by the Society for Psychical Research, previously mentioned. That is to say,
the sender may select cards from a pack, coins from a pile, small objects from a collection, etc.,
and then endeavor to transmit the impression of the same to the receiver—the latter then
reporting his flashes 77 of impression received. This may be rendered more complicated by
having the sender in one place, and the receiver at another, the time having previously been
agreed upon between them. In experiments conducted at long range, it has been generally found
better for the receiver to write down the word, thought, or mental, picture which has been
transmitted to him by the sender; and for the sender to write down the name or picture of the
thing the idea of which he has transmitted. These memoranda serve not only as scientific proof
of the experiment, but also serve as a barometer of progress being made during the experiments.

Automatic Writing.
In this connection it may be stated that many investigators and experimentors along the lines of
telepathic phenomena have met with considerable success in the direction of Automatic Writing
from living persons, which of course is merely a special form of Telepathy. In some cases the
communications received in this way were at first thought to be from disembodied entities, until
later it was discovered that the thoughts were actually transmitted (in some cases unintentionally)
by living persons. The late W. T. Stead, the London editor and famous investigator of psychic
phenomena, who was lost on the "Titanic" several years ago, was remarkably successful along
this special line of telepathic transmission, he being one of the most efficient receivers of this
kind of which those familiar with the subject have any knowledge. His written records of these
experiments are very interesting, and form a valuable contribution to this subject. In this class of
experiments, the sender concentrates fixedly upon 78 the thought—word for word—and wills
that the recipient write down the word so transmitted; the receiver sit passively at the time agreed
upon, and allows his arm and hand to be moved by means of the psychic currents beating upon
him, and which are then unconsciously transformed into muscular action—the process being
similar to that of ordinary writing, except that instead of the activity of the brain of the writer
being behind the muscular motion, that of the sender performs that task.

Psychic Sensitiveness.

The student of this book will find in the succeeding portions thereof, from time to time, certain
general instructions regarding the cultivation of psychic receptivity and sensitiveness. These
general instructions are also applicable to the cultivation of telepathic power, and may be
properly applied to that end. There is really but one general principle involved in all the many
forms of psychic receptivity, namely that of (1) shutting the senses to the ordinary impressions of
the outside world, and (2) opening the higher channels of sense to the impressions coming in the
form of vibrations of the higher forces and finer powers of Nature. At the last, it is simply a
matter of "getting in tune," just as truly as in the case of the wireless telegraphy. These things are
difficult to explain in ordinary words to one who has had no experience along these lines; but
when one begins to actually experiment and practice, the way opens out gradually and steadily,
and then the person can grasp the meaning of the little "hints" dropped by others who have
traveled the same path. So, after all, it comes down to the matter of Practice, Experiment, and
Learning by Trying!

79

PART IV
CLAIRVOYANCE AND KINDRED PHENOMENA

A very large and very interesting class of occult or psychic phenomena is that known under the
very general classification of "Clairvoyance," which term we have thought it advisable to employ
in this sense in this book, notwithstanding the technical objections urged by some against such a
general usage. The term "Clairvoyance" really means "clear seeing," or "clear sight," but its
special meaning, established by long usage, is "A power of discerning objects not perceptible to
the normal senses." When it comes to the technical use of the term by students and teachers of
psychic research and occultism, however, there is found a confused meaning of the term, some
employing it in one sense, and others in another one. Accordingly, it is perhaps as well to explain
the particular usage adopted and followed in this book.

Clairvoyance Defined.

The English Society for Psychical Research, in its glossary, defines the term as follows: "The
faculty or act of perceiving, as though visually, with some coincidental truth, some distant scene;
it is used 80 sometimes, but hardly properly, for transcendental vision, or the perception of beings
regarded as on another plane of existence." A distinguished investigator along psychic lines, in
one of her reports to the English Society for Psychical Research, has given the following
definition of this term as employed by her in her reports, viz., "The word 'clairvoyant' is often
used very loosely, and with widely different meanings. I denote by it a faculty of acquiring
supernormally, but not by reading the minds of persons present, a knowledge of facts such as
we normally acquire by the use of our senses. I do not limit it to knowledge that would normally
be acquired by the sense of sight, nor do I limit it to a knowledge of present facts. A similar
knowledge of the past, and if necessary, of future events, may be included. On the other hand, I
exclude the mere faculty of seeing apparitions, which is sometimes called clairvoyance."
The last stated definition agrees almost perfectly with the views of the writer of the present book,
and the term "Clairvoyance" is used here in the particular sense indicated by such definition. The
student of this book, therefore, is asked to distinguish Clairvoyance, on the one hand, from the
phenomena of Telepathy or Thought Transference, and, on the other hand, from the phenomena
of communication with entities on other planes of existence, including the perception of
apparitions.

The Phenomena of Clairvoyance.

The phenomena of Clairvoyance may be subdivided (a) according to methods employed, and
also (b) according to general distinctions. The said classifications follow:
81

Classification According to Methods. The classification of Clairvoyant Phenomena according

to methods employed, proceeds as follows: (1) Psychometry, in which the clairvoyant becomes
en rapport through the medium of some physical object connected with the person or scene
which is the object of the en rapport connection; (2) Crystal Gazing, etc., in which the en
rapport connection is established by means of a crystal, magic mirror, etc., into which the
clairvoyant gazes; (3) Direct Clairvoyance, in which the clairvoyant directly establishes the en
rapport connection by means of raising his or her psychic vibrations so as to become "in tune"
with the finer vibrations of Nature, without the aid of physical objects.

Classification According to General Distinctions.

The classification of Clairvoyant Phenomena according to general distinctions, proceeds as
follows: (1) Present Clairvoyance, in which the objects perceived by the clairvoyant are present
in Space and Time, although invisible to normal sight; (2) Space Clairvoyance, in which the
clairvoyant vision includes objects and scenes removed in space from the immediate normal
perception of the clairvoyant; (3) Time Clairvoyance, in which the clairvoyant perceives objects
or scenes removed from him in past time, or future time.
In order that the student may obtain a comprehensive understanding of the phenomena of
Clairvoyance, we have thought it well to give you a brief, general outline of the particular
phenomena fitting into these several classes, and to give you, also, a general idea of the principal
methods employed to 82 obtain the phenomenal manifestations in question. We begin by calling
your attention to the three general classes of method employed to obtain the manifestation of
clairvoyant phenomena, namely: Psychometry, Crystal Gazing, and Clairvoyant Psychic States,
respectively.

Psychometry.

In Psychometry, the clairvoyant establishes the en rapport connection with objects, persons or
scenes, removed in space or in time, by means of some physical object associated with the
distant object, person or scene; for instance, the physical objects may be a piece of clothing, a bit
of stone, a coin, a bit of jewelry, etc., which has been closely associated with that which the
clairvoyant desires to sense psychically. The distinctive feature of this class of clairvoyant
phenomena is this connecting link of physical objects. A writer has cleverly compared this
connecting link with the bit of clothing which the keen-scented bloodhound is given to sniff in
order that he may then discover by scent the person sought, the latter having previously worn the
bit of clothing presented to the dog's sense of smell.

The "Psychic Scent."

Occultists have elaborated a technical theory to account for the phenomena of Psychometry, or
rather to account for the action of the "connecting link" of the physical object employed to
establish the connection between clairvoyant and distant object, person, or scene. But we do not
think it advisable to enter into a discussion of these elaborate, technical theories, which are apt to
confuse the 83 beginner, and to distract his attention from the important facts of the case. We
think it is sufficient to say that the "connecting link," or physical object, seems to carry along
with it, in its inner substance or nature, the vibrations of its past environment; and that the
clairvoyant, coming into receptive contact with such vibrations, is enabled with comparative ease
to follow up the psychic "scent" until he establishes clairvoyant en rapport connection with the
distant object, person, or scene associated with the physical object. When it is remembered that
the physical "scent" of anything is merely a matter of the detection of certain vibrations, the
illustration is seen to be not so very far out of the way after all.

Magnetic Affinity.

A somewhat celebrated investigator of psychic and occult phenomena has said concerning this
phases of Clairvoyance: "The untrained clairvoyant usually cannot find any particular astral
picture when it is wanted, without some special link to put him en rapport with the subject
required. Psychometry is an instance in point. It seems as though there were a sort of magnetic
attachment or affinity between any particle of matter and the record which contains its history—
an affinity which enables it to act as a kind of conductor between that record and the faculties of
anyone who can read it. For instance, I once brought from Stonehenge a tiny fragment of stone,
not larger than a pin's head, and on putting this into an envelope and handing it to a
psychometrist who had no idea what it was, she at once began to describe that wonderful ruin
and the desolate country surrounding it, and then went on to picture 84 vividly what were
evidently scenes from its early history, showing that the infinitesimal fragment had been
sufficient to put her into communication with the records connected with the spot from which it
came. The scenes through which we pass in the course of our life seem to act in the same way
upon the cells of our brain as did the history of Stonehenge upon that particle of stone. They
establish a connection with those cells by means of which our mind is put en rapport with that
particular portion of the records, and so we 'remember' what we have seen."

Distant En Rapport.

One of the most familiar instances of the production of clairvoyant phenomena by means of
Psychometry is that illustrated in the above quotation, namely the production of the en rapport
relation with distant scenes by means of the connecting link of some small object which had at
some time in the past been located at that point. In such cases the psychometrist usually presses
the small object up to his or her head, and then induces a passive, receptive psychical condition;
then, sooner or later, the clairvoyant experiences a "sensation," or a "dream picture" of the scene
in question. Often, once the picture of the scene is obtained, the clairvoyant may manifest more
marked past-time clairvoyance, in the direction of running back over the history of the scene
itself. The instance related in the above quotation is a case of this kind. Similar cases are
frequently met with by the investigator along these lines, in which the clairvoyant is able to give
the history of certain places in ancient Egypt, from the connecting link of a piece of mummy-
cloth; 85 or else to give a picture of certain events in antediluvian times, from the connecting link
of a bit of fossil substance. The history of Psychometry is filled with remarkable instances of this
kind. Bullets gathered from battlefields also serve very effectively as such psychometric
connecting links. Old furniture, old pictures, and old jewelry also are common objects serving to
produce wonderful phenomena of this kind. In fact, any physical object having past-time or far-
distant space connections may be employed effectively in such experiments.

Psychic Underground Exploration.

Psychometry is frequently employed to describe underground or "mine" conditions existing at

the present time at the particular place from which a particular piece of ore or mineral has been
taken, which ore or mineral has been handed the psychometrist to be used as the connecting link.
As many practical miners know from actual experience, many valuable coal, zinc, lead, silver
and gold mines have been successfully located in this way. In such cases the psychometrist has
been able to follow up the psychic "scent" given by the piece of mineral, and thus to describe the
strata or veins of the mineral lying underground and unopened by the pick or drill.

Psychic Detective Work.

Many cases are recorded by the investigators in which the psychometrist is able to "sense" a
particular locality, a house, a room, a place of business, for instance, by means of the connecting
link afforded by some physical object formerly associated with the said location. Some writers
have called 86 this class of psychometric phenomena "psychic spying" or "psychic detective
work." One writer records a case in which he gave to a young psychometrist a penholder from
the office of a lawyer, the latter being located about eight hundred miles away; the psychometrist
then gave a perfect picture of the interior of the far-distant lawyer's office, the scene across the
street visible from the office window, and certain events which were happening in the office and
on the street at that particular time—all of which report was verified in detail by subsequent
careful inquiry.

How to Psychometrize.

The following general remarks concerning Psychometry, given by a writer on the subject, will be
found interesting and instructive. The writer says: "There are no special directions to be given
the student in psychometry. All that can be done is to suggest that each person should try the
experiments for himself, in order to find out whether he has, or has not the psychometric power
in some degree of development. He may be able to develop his psychometric powers by the
general methods given for psychic development; but, in any event, he will find that actual
practice and experiment will do much for him in the direction of experiment. Let the student take
strange objects, and, sitting in a quiet room with the object held to his forehead, endeavor to shut
out all thoughts coming from the outside world, and forget all his personal affairs. In a short
time, if the conditions be right, he will begin to have flashes of scenes associated with the history
of the object in question. At first these impressions may be somewhat disconnected and more
87 or less confused, but before long there will be noticed a clearing away of the scene, and the
mental picture will become quite plain. Practice will develop the power. The student should
practice only when alone or when in the presence of some sympathetic friend or friends. He
should always avoid discordant and inharmonious company while practicing his psychic power.
Many of the best psychometrists keep their physical eyes closed when practicing this power, thus
allowing the inner senses to function without distraction from the outer senses.

Developing Psychometry.

"You have doubtless heard of the sensing of sealed letters spoken of as pure clairvoyance. But
this phase of phenomena properly belongs to the realm of Psychometry. Letters frequently prove
to be very excellent connecting links in psychometric experiments. I advise the student to begin
with old letters. He will be surprised to discover how readily he will begin to receive psychic
impressions from the letters—either from the person who wrote them, or from the place in which
they were written, or from some one connected with their subsequent history. One of the most
interesting experiments I ever witnessed in Psychometry was that in which a letter that had been
forwarded from place to place, until it had gone completely around the globe, was
psychometrized by a young Hindu maid. Although ignorant of the outside world of foreign lands,
the young women was able to picture the people and scenery of every part of the globe in which
the letter had traveled. Her report was really an interesting 'travelogue' of a trip around the world,
given in tabloid form. The student may obtain 88 some interesting results in psychometrizing old
letters—but let him always be conscientious about it, and be careful to refrain from divulging the
secrets that will become his during the course of these experiments. Let him be honorable on the
psychic plane as well as on the physical plane—more so, rather than less so, in fact."

Varieties of Psychometry.

Another investigator along these lines gives the following instructive comments regarding the
practice of psychometric power: "Persons of a highly-strung nervous organization, with large
perceptive faculties make the best psychometrists. Phlegmatic people seldom psychometrize
clearly, and usually lack receptivity to the finer forces. Letters, clothes, hair, coins, ornaments, or
jewels—in fact, almost any article which has belonged to, or has been worn by, its possessor for
any length of time, will suffice to enable the psychometrist to relate himself to, and glimpse
impressions of, the personal sphere of that individual. Some psychometrists succeed better with
certain kinds of objects than with others. Metals and minerals are not good 'conductors'—if we
may use that term—to some operators; while they are very satisfactory to others. In the same
way, some psychometrists are very good character readers, others are very successful in the
diagnosis of diseases; some can read the book of Nature, while to others it is a sealed book, or
nearly so, but they are able to gauge the mental qualifications of their visitors, while others
realize their moral and spiritual states. Again, some read the Past, and enter into the Present
states or condition of their clients, while others are successful in exercising prophetical prevision.
89 These differences may be modified, and the boundaries of the perceptive power may be
extended by self-study, experiment, and culture; but every psychic has his qualifications and his
limitations; one will succeed where another may fail; hence it is well and wise for each one to
discover what he can do best, what sphere he can best occupy, and then endeavor to fill it.

Psychometric "Getting in Touch."

"A psychometrist may, by holding a letter in his hand, or putting it to his forehead, be able to
perceive and delineate the personal appearance of the writer thereof, and, in a way, to 'take on'
his conditions, describe his feelings and thoughts to such an extent as to identify himself with
him and to feel, for the time being, as if he, himself, were the writer; he may even tell what is
written in the letter, although unable to see the writing. Human hair is found by some
psychometrists to give them the best means of coming into touch with their subjects, and it is
said that such hair should be cut from the head just behind the ears, as close to the scalp as
possible. It not infrequently happens that a psychometrist gets started upon a false trail, so to
speak, and especially so when the inquirer is suspicious, or where there is a mixture of psychic
influences. A fan passed by a lady to a sitter in the front row at a meeting, and held in the hands
of the latter for a few minutes while awaiting a chance to be handed to the psychic, has resulted
in a blending of vibratory influences which has caused an imperfect or confused 'reading.' In one
case the gentleman who held the fan said 'I fully recognize the part of the description which the
lady does not admit 90 —it applies to myself quite perfectly.' Hence the necessity for care in
providing articles for psychometrists in a public meeting. A ring, for instance, which has been in
the family for generations, and handed from one wearer to another in the course of years, may
afford such a blending of psychic vibrations that the psychometrist may be unable to sense
distinctly each distinct stratum of influence therein.

Psychometric Readings.
"The person who sits for the psychometrist for a 'reading' should not be antagonistic nor
frivolous, neither should he desire special information, nor concentrate his thought forces upon
any given point, as otherwise he may dominate the psychic and thus mislead him into perceiving
only a reflex of his own hopes or fears. He will do well to preserve an open mind, and an
impartial though sympathetic mental attitude, and then await results. It is unwise to interrupt,
explain, or question during the time that a delineation is being given, for by so doing the psychic
sphere is disturbed and the thought projections caused to act like the breezes upon the surface of
a lake, producing confused and distorted appearances. It is best to allow the descriptions to be
given in its entirety before asking questions regarding any of its details; it is quite possible or
probable that the very points upon which inquiries seem necessary will be more fully elucidated
before the close of the reading. If a special reading, and not a general one is required—say, for
instance, a diagnosis of diseased conditions—a hint of what is desired at the outset should be
sufficient."

Crystal Gazing, Etc.

91

The second of the three general classes of the methods employed to obtain the manifestation of
clairvoyant phenomena is that known as Crystal Gazing. In this class of methods the clairvoyant
establishes the en rapport condition by means of a crystal, magic mirror, or similar object, which
serves principally to concentrate the psychic visual powers to a focus, and thus to enable the
psychic to raise his or her psychic vibrations at that concentrated focused point.

Crystals and Bright Objects.

The use of crystals and other bright objects for this purpose has been common to occultists and
psychics at all times, past and present, and at all places, oriental or occidental. The earlier races
employed shining pieces of quartz or other clear crystal rock for this purpose. Later polished
metals were used in the same way. The native soothsayers of barbaric lands employ clear water,
glowing embers, or sparks, for this purpose. In some places the soothsayers hold drops of blood
in the hollow of their hands for divining purposes. Others bore a hole in the ground, and fill it
with water, and then gaze into it. Some tribes use dark polished stones. A writer on the subject
has said: "They stare into a crystal ball, a cup, a mirror, a blot of ink, a drop of blood, a bowl of
water, a pond, water in a glass bowl, or almost any polished surface, etc." In fact, it may be said
that almost every object capable of presenting a polished surface has been employed by some
race as an aid to psychic vision. In Europe and America, at the present day, quartz or glass
92 crystals are so used; but others obtain quite satisfactory results from the use of watch crystals
laid over a black cloth, preferably a piece of black velvet cloth. Others use highly polished bits of
silver; while others content themselves with the use of a little pool of black ink lying on the
bottom of a small saucer, while others have cups painted black on the inside, into which is
poured water.

The Care of the Crystal.

There is no particular virtue in any particular object used for this purpose, as such object acts
merely to focus the psychic power of the person, as has been said. Certainly the student should
not fall into the error of supposing that the crystal, or similar object, has any miraculous or
supernatural power whatsoever, it is simply an instrument, like the microscope or telescope,
nothing more or less. But, at the same time, it must be admitted that there is much truth in the
claim of certain crystal gazers, to the effect that the use of a particular crystal seems to have the
effect of polarizing its molecules so as to render it a more effective instrument in time. In fact,
the phenomenon seems to bear a close relation to the well known case of a long-used violin
becoming a more perfect instrument, and giving forth richer and fuller notes than a new
instrument. The longer a gazing crystal is used, especially by the one person, the better does it
seem to serve the purposes of that particular person. Experts in crystal gazing insist that the
crystal gazer should keep his own crystal for his own particular use, and not allow it to be used
indiscriminately, particularly in the case of strangers or of persons not sympathetic with psychic
subjects. They claim that each crystal 93 becomes polarized according to the individual character
and needs of the person habitually using it, and that it is unwise to allow others to disturb this
quality in it.

How to Use the Crystal.

The best authorities on the subject of crystal-gazing insist that all experiments along the said
lines should be conducted in a serious, earnest manner, and that all frivolity or trifling should be
avoided if the best results are wished for. This, of course, is true concerning all phases of psychic
investigation, as all true students of the subject know. All the authorities agree that the crystal
gazer should sit with the light behind his back, and never in front of him. While an earnest steady
gaze is desirable, there should be no straining of the eyes. As one writer has said: "Gaze calmly
at the crystal, but do not strain your eyes. Do not try to avoid winking your eyes—there is a
difference between 'gazing' and 'staring,' remember." Some authorities advise that the crystal
gazer should make funnels of his hands, using them as he would a pair of opera-glasses.

The "Milky Mist."

While some experimenters obtain results almost from the time of the first trial, others find that it
requires a number of sittings before they begin to obtain even faint results. The psychic picture in
the crystal usually begins by the appearance of a cloudy "milky mist," succeeding the former
transparent appearance of the crystal. The milky cloud becomes more dense, and finally there
appears in its midst a 94 faint form, outline, face, or scene of some kind. Some have compared
this gradual emergence of the picture to the gradual development of the picture of the
photographic plate when the latter is subjected to the action of the developing fluid.

Classes of Psychic Pictures.

An English writer on the subject furnishes the following general classification of the psychic
pictures manifested in the process of crystal gazing. The said authority might well have added
that each and every form of clairvoyant picturing is possible in crystal gazing; for crystal gazing
is merely one particular form or method of inducing clairvoyant or psychic vision, and is not a
distinct branch of psychic phenomena in itself. The classification of the English authority,
however, is as follows:
"1. Images of something unconsciously observed. New reproductions, voluntary or spontaneous,
and bringing no fresh knowledge to the mind.
"2. Images of ideas unconsciously acquired from others. Some memory or imaginative effort
which does not come from the gazer's ordinary self. Revivals of memory. Illustrations of
thought.
"3. Images, clairvoyant or prophetic. Pictures giving information as to something past, present,
or future, which the gazer has no other chance of knowing."

General Directions for Crystal Gazing.

An old English authority on the subject of crystal gazing handed down to his students a certain
set of general directions and rules to govern the conduct of their experiments. These rules and
directions 95 have never been improved upon by the later writers on the subject, according to the
opinion of the best authorities; and such stand today as perhaps the simplest and best set of
general rules and directions on this important subject. For this reason we have thought it
advisable to include the same in this chapter, for the guidance of our own students. Here follow
the said general rules and directions:
"What is desired through the regular use of the translucent sphere is to cultivate a personal
degree of clairvoyant power, so that visions of things or events, past, present, and future, may
appear clearly in the interior vision, or eye of the soul. In the pursuit of this effort only, the
crystal becomes at once a beautiful, interesting and harmless channel of pleasure and instruction,
shorn of dangers, and rendered conducive to mental development. To the attainment of this
desirable end, attention is asked to the following practical directions, which, if carefully
followed, will lead to success:

Selection of Place, Etc.

"(1) Select a quiet room where you will be entirely undisturbed, taking care that it is as far as
possible free from mirrors, ornaments, pictures, glaring colors, and the like, which may
otherwise distract the attention. The room should be of comfortable temperature, in accordance
with the time of year, neither hot nor cold. About 60 to 65 degrees Fahr. is suitable in most cases,
though allowance can be made where necessary for natural differences in the temperaments of
various persons. Thus thin, nervous, delicately organized individuals, and those of lymphatic and
soft, easy-going, passive types, require a slightly warmer apartment than the more 96 positive
class who are known by their dark eyes, hair and complexion, combined with prominent joints.
Should a fire, or any form of artificial light be necessary, it should be screened off, so as to
prevent the light rays from being reflected in, or in any other manner directly reaching the
crystal. The room should not be dark, but rather shadowed, or charged with a dull light,
somewhat such as prevails on a cloudy or wet day.

Adjusting the Crystal.

"(2) The crystal should be placed on its stand on a table, or it may rest on a black velvet cushion,
but in either case it should be partially surrounded by a black silk or similar wrap or screen, so
adjusted as to cut off any undesirable reflection. Before beginning to experiment, remember that
most frequently nothing will be seen on the first occasion, and possibly not for several sittings;
though some sitters, if strongly gifted with psychic powers in a state of unconsciousness, and
sometimes conscious degree of unfoldment, may be fortunate enough to obtain good results at
the first trial. If, therefore, nothing is perceived during the first few attempts, do not despair or
become impatient, or imagine that you will never see anything. There is a royal road to crystal
vision, but it is open only to the combined password of Calmness, Patience, and Perseverance. If
at the first attempt to ride a bicycle, failure ensues, the only way to learn is to pay attention to the
necessary rules, and to persevere daily until the ability to ride comes naturally. Thus it is with the
would-be seer. Persevere in accordance with these simple directions, and success will sooner or
later crown your efforts.

Time of Sittings.

97

"(3) Commence by sitting comfortably with the eyes fixed upon the crystal, not by a fixed stare,
but with a steady, calm gaze, for ten minutes only, on the first occasion. In taking the time it is
best to hang your watch at a distance, where, while the face is clearly visible, the ticking is
rendered inaudible. When the time is up, carefully put the crystal away in its case, and keep it in
a dark place, under lock and key, allowing no one but yourself to handle it. At the second sitting,
which should be at the same place, in the same position, and at the same time, you may increase
the length of the effort to fifteen minutes, and continue this period during the next five or six
sittings, after which the time may be gradually increased, but should in no case exceed one hour.
The precise order of repetition is always to be followed until the experimenter has developed an
almost automatic ability to readily obtain results, when it need no longer be adhered to.

Other Persons Present.

"(4) Any person, or persons, admitted to the room, and allowed to remain while you sit, should
(a) keep absolute silence, and (b) remain seated at a distance from you. When you have
developed your latent powers, questions may, of course, be put to you by one of those present,
but even then in a very gentle, or low and slow tone of voice; never suddenly, or in a forceful
manner.

Crystalline Vision.

"(5) When you find the crystals begin to look dull or cloudy, with small pin-points of light
glittering 98 therein, like tiny stars, you may know that you are commencing to obtain that for
which you seek, viz., crystalline vision. Therefore, persevere with confidence. This condition
may, or may not, continue for several sittings, the crystal seeming at times to alternatively appear
and disappear, as in a mist. By and by this hazy appearance, in its turn, will give way quite
suddenly to a blindness of the senses to all else but a blue or bluish ocean of space, against
which, as if it were a background, the vision will be clearly apparent.

Physical Requirements.
"(6) The crystal should not be used soon after taking a meal, and care should be taken in matters
of diet to partake only of digestible foods, and to avoid alcoholic beverages. Plain and nourishing
food, and outdoor exercise, with contentment of mind, or love of simplicity of living, are great
aids to success. Mental anxiety, or ill-health, are not conducive to the desired end. Attention to
correct breathing is of importance.

Determining Time of Fulfillment.

"(7) As regards the time at which events seen will come to pass, each seer is usually impressed
with regard thereto; but, as a general rule, visions appearing in the extreme background indicate
time more remote, either past or future, than those perceived nearer at hand; while those
appearing in the foreground, or closer to the seer, denote the present or immediate future.

Two Classes of Visions.

99

"(8) Two principal classes of vision will present themselves to the sitter, viz.: (a) the Symbolic,
indicated by the appearance of symbols such as a flag, boat, knife, gold, etc., and (b) Actual
Scenes and Personages, in action or otherwise. Persons of a positive type of organization, the
more active, excitable, yet decided type, are most likely to perceive symbolically, or
allegorically; while those of a passive nature usually receive direct or literal revelations. Both
classes will find it necessary to carefully cultivate truthfulness, unselfishness, gratitude for what
is shown, and absolute confidence in the love, wisdom, and guidance of God Himself."

Time and Space in Crystal Gazing.

In the subsequent pages the student will perceive the different manifestations of clairvoyant
vision classified according to the distinction of Time and Space. Clairvoyant vision may disclose
objects, scenes, or persons either near by in space, or far off in space; either existing in present
time, in past time, or in future time. Inasmuch as the visions of crystal gazing are merely
particular forms of clairvoyant vision, it follows that all of the several above named distinctive
forms of vision are manifested in crystal gazing. The vision shown in the crystal may be that of
something very near in space, or perhaps very far off in space, or removed in space only a
moderate distance. Likewise such vision may be based upon things existing at the present time,
or at some period of past time, or at some period of and visions of past, present, or future things,
events, persons, scenes—each or all of these manifestations 100 are possible to the clairvoyant
vision of the crystal gazer, and pictured in the reflecting surface of the crystal or other shining
surface employed by him in his experiments.

Direct Clairvoyance.

The third of the three general classes of the methods employed to obtain the manifestation of
clairvoyant phenomena is that known as Direct Clairvoyance. In this class of methods the
clairvoyant directly establishes the en rapport connection with the past or present, near or distant,
objects, persons, scenes, or events, by means of raising his or her psychic vibrations so as to
become "in tune" with the finer vibrations of Nature, without the aid of the physical objects
required in the methods of Psychometry and Crystal Gazing, respectively.

Trance Conditions.

Many clairvoyants, manifesting their powers by means of the methods of Direct Clairvoyance,
produce in themselves the condition of trance, or semi-trance condition. Many students believe
that these conditions are absolutely necessary for the production of this kind of phenomena, but
they neglect, or are actually unaware of, the fact that many of the highest forms of this class of
clairvoyant phenomena are manifested by clairvoyants who are no more in a trance condition, or
that of semi-trance, than those following the methods of Psychometry or Crystal Gazing,
respectively. All that is required is that the clairvoyant maintain a quiescent mental attitude,
shutting out the sounds, sights, and thoughts of the outside world, and concentrating the 101 full
attention upon the clairvoyant work before him or her. Some, it is true, pass easily into the semi-
trance, or even the full trance condition, but the latter are not absolutely necessary states.

Clairvoyant Reverie.

A writer on the subject of Clairvoyance says: "The best authorities instruct their pupils that the
state of clairvoyant reverie may be safely and effectively induced by the practice of mental
concentration alone. They advise positively against artificial methods. All that is needed is that
the consciousness be focused to a single point—become 'one pointed' as the Hindu teachers call
it. The intelligent practice of concentration accomplishes this without the necessity of any
artificial methods of development, or the production of abnormal psychic states. You easily
concentrate your full attention when you witness an interesting play, or listen to a beautiful
rendition of some great masterpiece of musical composition, or gaze at some miracle of pictured
or sculptured art. In these cases your attention is completely occupied with the interesting thing
before you, so that you have almost completely shut out the outer world of sound, sight, and
thought—but you are, nevertheless, perfectly wide awake and conscious. The same thing is true
when you read a very interesting book—the world is shut out from your consciousness, and you
are oblivious to the sights and sounds around you. We frequently witness the sight of two lovers
to whom the outside world is non-existent for the time being, and to whom there is nothing in the
world except themselves. Again, persons often fall into a 'brown study,' or 'day dream,' in which
all consciousness of the outside 102 world seems to be shut out, yet the person is fully conscious
and wide awake. These mental states are very much akin to that of the trained clairvoyant, and is
the state which should be sought after by all clairvoyants, whether they are following the
methods of Psychometry, Crystal Gazing, or that of Direct Clairvoyance—for the principle is
one and the same in all of such methods."

The Dawn of Clairvoyance.

A well-known authority on the subject of Psychic Development says: "Occasional flashes of

clairvoyance sometimes comes to the highly cultured and spiritual-minded man, even though he
may never have heard of the possibility of training such a faculty. In his case such glimpses
usually signify that he is approaching that stage in his evolution when these powers will naturally
begin to manifest themselves. Their appearance should serve as an additional stimulus to him to
strive to maintain that high standard of moral purity and mental balance without which
clairvoyance is a curse and not a blessing to its possessor. Between those who are entirely
unimpressionable and those who are in full possession of clairvoyant power, there are many
intermediate stages. Students often ask how this clairvoyant faculty will first be manifested in
themselves—how they may know when they have reached the stage at which its first faint
foreshadowings are beginning to be visible. Cases differ so widely that it is impossible to give to
this question any answer that will be universally applicable. Some people begin by a plunge, as it
were, and under some unusual stimulus become able just for once to see some striking vision;
and very often in such a case, because 103 the experience does not repeat itself, the seer comes in
time to believe that on that occasion he must have been the victim of hallucination. Others begin
by becoming intermittently conscious of the brilliant colors and vibrations of the human aura; yet
others find themselves with increasing frequency seeing and hearing something to which those
around them are blind and deaf; others, again, see faces, landscapes, or colored clouds floating
before their eyes in the dark, before they sink to rest; while perhaps the commonest experience of
all is that of those who begin to recollect with greater and greater clearness what they have seen
and heard on other planes during sleep."

Methods of Development.

The same authority, after warning students against attempting to develop their psychic powers by
unnatural and harmful practices, such as self-hypnotism, self-stupefication, etc., gives the
following excellent advice concerning the normal development of clairvoyant and other high
psychic powers and faculties: "There is one practice which if adopted carefully and reverently
can do no harm to any human being, yet from which a very pure type of clairvoyance has
sometimes been developed—and that is the practice of Meditation. Let a man choose a certain
time every day—a time when he can rely upon being quiet and undisturbed, though preferably in
the daytime rather than at night—and set himself at that time to keep his mind for a few minutes
entirely free from all earthly thoughts of any kind whatsoever; and, when that is achieved, to
direct the whole force of his being towards the highest ideal he happens to know. He will find
that to gain perfect 104 control of thought is enormously more difficult than he supposes, but
when he attains it this cannot but be in every way more beneficial to him, and as he grows more
and more able to elevate and concentrate his thoughts, he may gradually find that new worlds are
opening before his sight. As a preliminary training towards the satisfactory achievement of such
meditation, he will find it desirable to make a practice of concentration in the affairs of daily life
—even in the smallest of them. If he writes a letter, let him think of nothing else but that letter
until it is finished; if he reads a book, let him see to it that his thought is never allowed to wander
away from his author's meaning. He must learn to hold his mind in check, and to be master of
that also, as well as of his lower passions; he must patiently labor to acquire absolute control of
his thoughts, so that he will always know exactly what he is thinking about, and why—so that he
can use his mind, and turn it or hold it still, as a practiced swordsman turns his weapon where he
will."

105
 PART V
CLAIRVOYANCE: PAST, PRESENT AND FUTURE

As we have said in the preceding chapter, in our consideration of the general subject of
Clairvoyance, there is possible a general classification of clairvoyant phenomena according to
general distinctions, as follows: (1) Present Clairvoyance, in which the objects perceived by the
clairvoyant are present in time and in space, although invisible to normal sight; (2) Space
Clairvoyance, in which the clairvoyant vision includes objects and scenes removed in space
from the normal perception of the clairvoyant; and (3) Time Clairvoyance, in which the
clairvoyant perceives objects or scenes removed from him in past time, or future time.
While the general methods of manifesting these various forms of clairvoyant power are
practically the same, yet the nature of these several forms of phenomena vary considerably, as
we shall see when we come to consider them in detail in the following pages: this is particularly
true in the case of the distinction between past-time clairvoyant phenomena, 106 and future-time
clairvoyant phenomena—the difference between the perception of what has been, and that which
has not yet been.

Present Clairvoyance.

In what is called Present Clairvoyance the objects perceived by the clairvoyant are present in
time and in space, at the moment and place of the perception, although invisible to normal sight.
It is seen at once that if the object seen clairvoyantly is present in time and in space to the
clairvoyant, and yet is incapable of being perceived by the normal sight of the clairvoyant, then
that object must be capable of being perceived only through vibrations above the normal range of
the human senses. Perhaps the precise nature of this class of clairvoyant perceptions will be
better understood by a more detailed description of the objects actually perceived by clairvoyant
vision of this mode of manifestation.

The Human Aura.

In the first place, this mode of clairvoyant vision discloses the interesting phenomena concerned
with the human aura, or psychic atmosphere which surrounds the human body for a space of
several feet, assuming an egg-shaped form. A writer says on this point: "The trained clairvoyant
vision sees the human aura as a nebulous hazy substance, like a luminous cloud, surrounding the
person for two or three feet on each side of his body, becoming more dense near the body, and
gradually becoming less dense as it extends away from the body. It has a phosphorescent
appearance, with a peculiar tremulous motion manifesting through its substance. The clairvoyant
107 sees the human aura as composed of all the colors of the spectrum, the combination shifting
with the changing mental and emotional states of the person. But, in a general way, it may be
said that each person has his or her distinctive astral auric colors, depending upon his or her
general character or personality. Each mental state, or emotional manifestation, has its own
particular shade or combination of shades of auric coloring. This beautiful kaleidoscopic
spectacle has its own meaning to the occultist with clairvoyant vision, for he is thus able to read
the character and general mental states of the person by means of studying his auric colors. The
human aura is not in a state of calm phosphorescence, however. On the contrary, it sometimes
manifests great flames, like those of a fiery furnace, which shoot forth great tongues, and dart
forth suddenly in certain directions toward the objects attracting them. Under great emotional
excitement the auric flames move around in swift circling whirlpools, or else swirl away from a
centre. Again, it seems to throw forth tiny glistening sparks of psychic vibrations, some of which
travel for a great distance.

The Prana Aura.

"The clairvoyant vision is also able to discern what is called the 'prana aura' of a person. By this
term is indicated that peculiar emanation of vital force which surrounds the physical body of
each and every person. In fact, many persons of but slight clairvoyant power, who cannot sense
the auric colors, are able to perceive this prana aura without trouble. It is sometimes called the
'health aura,' or 'physical aura.' It is colorless, or rather about 108 the shade of clear glass,
diamond, or water. It is streaked with very minute, bristle-like lines. In a state of good health
these fine lines are stiff like toothbrush bristles; while in the case of poor health these lines
droop, curl, and present a furlike appearance. It is sometimes filled with minute sparkling
particles, like tiny vibratory motion. To the clairvoyant vision the prana aura appears like the
vibrating heated air arising from a fire, or stove, or from the heated earth in summertime. If the
student will close his eyes partially, and peer through narrowed eyelids, he will in all probability
be able to perceive this prana aura surrounding the body of some healthy, vigorous person—
particularly if that person be standing in a dim light. Looking closely, he will see the peculiar
vibratory motion, like heated air, at a distance of about two inches from the body of the person. It
requires a little practice in order to acquire the knack of perceiving these vibrations—a little
experimenting in order to get just the right light on the person—but practice will bring success,
and you will be repaid for your trouble. In the same way, the student may by practice acquire the
faculty of perceiving his own prana aura. The simplest way to obtain this last mentioned result is
to place your fingers (spread out into fan-shape) against a black background, in a dim light. Then
gaze at the fingers through narrowed eyelids, and half-closed eyes. After a little practice, you
will see a fine thin line surrounding your fingers on all sides—a semi-luminous border of prana
aura. In most cases this border of aura is colorless, but sometimes a very pale yellowish hue is
perceived. The stronger the vital force of the person, the stronger and brighter will this border of
prana aura appear. The aura 109 surrounding the fingers will appear very much like the semi-
luminous radiance surrounding a gas-flame, or the flame of a candle, which is familiar to
everyone."

The Auric Colors.

Another writer says of the clairvoyant perception of the human aura: "As he looks, the
clairvoyant will see himself surrounded by the luminous mist of the aura, flashing with all sorts
of brilliant colors, and constantly changing hue and brilliancy with every variation of the person's
thought and feelings. He will see this aura flooded with the beautiful rose-color of pure affection,
the rich blue of devotional feeling, the hard, dull brown of selfishness, the deep scarlet of anger,
the horrible lurid red of sensuality, the livid grey of fear, the black clouds of hatred and malice,
or any of the other hundredfold indications so easily to be read in it by the practiced eye; and
thus it will be impossible for any persons to conceal from his the real state of their feelings on
any subject. Not only does the astral aura show him the temporary result of the emotion passing
through it at the moment, but it also gives him, by an arrangement and proportion of its colors
when in a condition of perfect rest, a clue to the general disposition and character of its owner."

Thought Forms.

Another phase of clairvoyant phenomena of this class is that of the perception of "thought
forms," as they are called by occultists. As all students of occultism know, a strong thought or
emotion manifests a certain high vibratory motion, and takes upon itself a vibratory "form"
which is plainly perceptible 110 to the trained clairvoyant vision. These thought-forms manifest a
great variety in appearance and character. Some appear in a faint wave-like form, something like
the tiny waves caused by the dropping of a pebble in a pond of water. Others take on a whirlpool
form, rotating and whirling as they move through space. Others appear like whirling rings,
similar in general form to the "ring" puffed forth from the mouth of a cigar smoker, or from the
funnel of a locomotive. Others glow like great opals. Others appear like jets emitted from the
spout of a teakettle. Others twist along like a corkscrew. Others appear like exploding bombs.
Others branch out arms like a devil-fish, which wriggle in all directions, as if striving to attach
themselves to some object upon which they wish to take hold.

The X-Ray Sense.

Another phase of clairvoyant phenomena of this general class is that which may be called "the
X-Ray Sense," for indeed it enables the clairvoyant to see through a brick wall, or other material
obstacle, or through a sealed letter, etc. The higher psychic vibrations easily pass through the
most solid object, just as do the X-Rays, and consequently the clairvoyant is able to see what is
going on on the other side of a brick wall, or the walls of a house. Likewise, the clairvoyant
vision is able to pierce through the dense earth, and to perceive veins of mineral or metal lying
concealed beneath.

Microscopic Vision.

Another phase of clairvoyant power of this general class, but one not nearly so common as those
111 above mentioned, is described by a well-known occultist as follows: "Another strange power
of which the clairvoyant may find himself in possession is that of magnifying at will the minutest
physical particle to any desired size, as through a microscope—though no microscope ever
made, or ever likely to be made, possesses even a thousandth part of this psychic magnifying
power. By its means the hypothetical molecule and atom postulated by science becomes visible
and living realities to the occult student, and on this closer examination he finds them to be much
more complex in their structure than the scientific man has yet realized them to be. It also
enables him to follow with the closest attention and the most lively interest all kinds of electrical,
magnetic, and other etheric action; and when some of the specialists in these branches of science
are able to develop the power to see these things whereof they speak so facilely, some very
wonderful and beautiful revelations may be expected."

Space Clairvoyance.
In what is called Space Clairvoyance the objects, persons, scenes, or events perceived by the
clairvoyant are removed in space from him—often being located at points in space thousands of
miles distant, in fact. The pages of works upon occultism, and those devoted to the recording of
proved instances gathered by the societies for psychical research, are filled with the most
interesting cases of this form of clairvoyant vision. Instances are recorded, upon the very best
possible authority, in which persons with clairvoyant powers have been perfectly cognizant of
events occurring on the other 112 side of the world, or across the Atlantic or Pacific Oceans. In
fact, it would seem that distance and space are practically wiped out in this form of clairvoyant
phenomena, and that it is just as easy to see clairvoyantly over the space of a thousand miles, as
over that of a hundred feet—the principle involved being precisely the same.

The Psychic Telescope.

Space Clairvoyance, or Distant Clairvoyance, is manifested in the form of Psychometry, Crystal

Gazing, or Direct Clairvoyance, as we have said. We do not consider it necessary to record here
any typical instances of this phase of phenomena, as the many books on this subject are chiefly
devoted to a recital thereof, and every student is more or less acquainted with the same. The
whole matter may be summed up by saying that in this form of clairvoyant vision, there is
manifested what might be called a "psychic telescope with an X-Ray attachment," thus enabling
one to see at any distance, and through any intervening objects. This gives you a mental picture
of the process.

Radio-Activity.

In the theory of vibratory forces, as set forth in the earlier chapters of this book, we have the only
scientific explanation of the phenomena of distant clairvoyance. Modern science, in its teachings
regarding the radio-activity of physical objects, has thrown much additional light on this subject,
and has corroborated the ancient occult teachings on the subject. These rays of higher vibratory
power are like the rays of light or heat, although 113 of a much higher rate of intensity and
vibratory motion, and though the most delicate scientific instruments are able to register some of
these, it is still practically admitted by science that the highest of these radio-active vibrations are
beyond the scope and field of even the most sensitive instrument yet known to science. This is
saying much when we remember that some of the delicate instruments of science are so sensitive
that they are able to register the heat waves of a candle at the distance of one mile; while others
are able to record the presence of certain chemical elements in the most distant of the visible
stars, by means of the light waves carrying certain forms of vibration.

Sensing the Higher Vibrations.

Under the radio-active theory it is quite reasonable to conceive of the clairvoyant sense being
able to register and interpreting these higher vibrations which are beyond the power of even the
most delicate instruments of science. It must be admitted that the existence of such vibrations
being granted—and science tacitly admits their presence—then ordinary distances on earth
would be no barrier at all to the action of clairvoyant vision capable of registering them.
Moreover, in such case all intervening objects would be penetrated by these waves, and as a
writer has well said, "they would be able to cross one another to infinity in all directions without
entanglement, precisely as the vibrations of ordinary light do." Physical science and psychic
science at last seem to have arrived at a common ground of understanding, and many of the most
advanced scientists do not hesitate to admit this 114 fact, though their more conservative brethren
hesitate to do so.

Viewing Distant Scenes.

A writer has said of this form of clairvoyant perception: "The view of a distant scene obtained in
this way is in many ways not unlike that seen through a telescope. Human figures usually appear
very small, like those upon a distant stage, but in spite of their diminutive size they are clear as
though they were close by. Sometimes it is possible by this means to hear what is said as well as
to see what is done; but as in the majority of cases this does not happen, we must consider it
rather as the manifestation of an additional power than as a necessary corollary of the faculty of
sight. It will be observed that in cases of this kind the clairvoyant does not actually leave his
physical body at all—he simply manufactures for himself, and uses, a kind of psychic telescope.
Consequently he has the use of his physical powers while he is examining the distant scene; for
example, his voice usually describes what he sees even while he is in the act of making the
observation."

Time Clairvoyance.

In what is called Time Clairvoyance the clairvoyant is able to perceive objects, persons, scenes,
and events removed from him in past time or future time. That is to say, the clairvoyant
perceives things which have existed in the physical world in times long past, which things have
long since vanished from physical existence; or, on the other hand, he perceives things which
belong to future existence 115 —this which have never as yet been in physical existence, and of
course are not in such existence at the present time. The careful student will see at once that the
principle of manifestation governing these two respective phases of clairvoyance must be quite
different; and, accordingly, the two respective phases must be considered separately and apart
from each other.

Past Time Clairvoyance.

In what is known as Past Time Clairvoyance there is the manifestation of clairvoyant vision in
the direction of scenes and occurrences of the past. Here, the clairvoyant perceives the events
and scenes of past time just as clearly and plainly as if such were present before him in time and
in space. Just as in Distant Clairvoyance it is just as easy for the clairvoyant to see things at a
great distance as those at a short distance, so in Past Time Clairvoyance it is just as easy for the
clairvoyant to see things and events occurring five thousand years ago as it is to see things
occurring one year ago, or one week ago for that matter. The principle involved is the same in
either case.

The Mystery of Seeing the Past.

To persons investigating the phenomena of clairvoyance for the first time, however, there seems
to be a much greater mystery attached to the phenomena of Past Clairvoyance than in the case of
Distant Clairvoyance. To such persons it seems that while the perception of distant objects,
scenes, and events is wonderful and mysterious, still at the last it is merely the perception of
something now actually in 116 existence—merely the extension of one's normal powers of vision
so as to include objects beyond the range of the ordinary vision, but, still, actually in existence
though at a distance. The idea of the telescope enables the mind to grasp the naturalness of this
kind of phenomena. But when it comes to the perception of things, scenes, and events which are
no longer in existence—things which have passed entirely out of existence—the mystery seems
to be increased, and incredulity becomes more insistent. But to the occultist there is really no
more mystery in the one case than in the other—both sets of phenomena are seen to be perfectly
reasonable and within the realms of Nature. Let us now see how and why the occultists view the
matter in this light.

Analogies on the Physical Plane.

We may find many correspondences on the physical plane to serve as illustrations of the
phenomena of Past Time Clairvoyance, if we will but look for them. For instance, when we
withdraw a heated stove from a room, the heat remains in the room. Likewise, though a woman
bearing the odor of a certain perfume on her clothing may have passed from a house, the odor
still lingers there. The wake of an ocean steamer is often visible for hours after the ship has
passed from sight. As modern science expressed it: "Causes continue to exist in their Effects."

Thousand-Year-Old Light.

But we have a much more striking illustration and correspondence in the case of the transmission
of light from the distant stars, which we will do well to carefully consider. Light travels at the
rate of 117 186,000 miles per second. A "light-year," as known to astronomers, means the
distance traversed by a light wave (at the stated rate of travel) during the period of one of our
earth years. Some of the distant stars are estimated to be fully one thousand light-years distant
from us; or, in other words, the light we now perceive as coming from them really is the light
that left them one thousand years ago. If one of these stars were to be destroyed, observers on
this earth would not become aware of it for a thousand years. The star whose light we may now
perceive may actually have been destroyed nearly one thousand years ago. Other stars are only
one hundred light-years removed from us in space; others only a few years; others only a few
hours. But the principle is just the same in all cases, namely, that we see the stars not as they are
at the present moment, but as they were when the light left them, perhaps many years ago. Thus,
as you see, we may actually perceive events long after their happening.

Reading the Light Waves.

Now, if our physical vision was sufficiently powerful to magnify objects on the stars, or if we
had instruments to do this for us, we could actually witness scenes, objects, persons and events
which had passed out of existence a thousand years ago. Their records are present in these light
waves from the stars, and all that is needed is an eye or a telescope sufficiently strong to register
them upon our mind. In a fanciful story written by Camille Flammarion, the French astronomer,
many years ago, the principal character relates how, traveling in the astral 118 body, he was able
to witness the events of the French Revolution which had occurred many years before, by simply
proceeding to the necessary distance from the earth and there perceiving the registered records in
the earth's light-waves traveling through space at the rate of 186,000 miles a second. In fact, by
getting at the right distance he was able to see even the events of his own childhood and youth,
every event of his life, in fact, up to the moment of his leaving the earth. This story, fanciful as it
is, nevertheless is based upon scientific facts, and its happenings would be quite possible for a
being capable of traveling at a sufficiently rapid rate through space, and also possessed of the
power of magnifying the records of light rays. In fact, a person on earth possessing the power of
Distant Clairvoyance might be able to duplicate these feats, providing he were able to come in
rapport contact with one of these light-waves bearing the past-time records. Think for a moment,
and you will grasp the point of this statement.

The Akashic Plane.

But this, however, is but an illustration of the correspondence on the ordinary physical plane of
certain things on a higher plane of Nature. Past Time Clairvoyance is not dependent upon light-
waves, or any other of the lesser phases of vibratory activity. Instead, it depends entirely upon
the phenomena and facts of a higher plane of Nature—a plane which occultists have called the
Akashic Plane. Some occultists prefer the general term, "the Astral Plane," but the former term is
a closer and more definite one. The Akashic Plane, as known to occultists, contains the
impressions or "records" 119 of all events that have happened on the earth plane during the
present cycle of earth manifestation. The very subtle and tenuous substance of the Akashic Plane
—the term "etheric" may best describe the nature of this substance—contains traces and
impressions of all the happenings of the past of this earth; and such impressions may be read and
seen by the clairvoyant who has developed sufficiently high powers of vision. These Akashic
Records have well been called "the substantial memory of the earth." Upon the subtle etheric
substance of the Akashic Plane are registered the records of every event, thing, object,
happening, or activity of the earth which has existed or been manifested from the very beginning
of the present cycle of the earth's existence. These records will, it is claimed, persist until the
final ending of the present earth cycle.

The Akashic Records.

The clairvoyant whose powers of Past Time Clairvoyance have been developed sufficiently, and
who has mastered the art of concentration of his psychic attention, manages to come into more or
less perfect en rapport condition contact with these Akashic Records, and is thus enabled to read
from them what he sees there. To him it actually seems as if he were seeing the actions of things
in present existence, and many excellent clairvoyants are ignorant of the existence of the Akashic
Records, though they habitually read the contents thereof; these clairvoyants know simply that
they "see" these past happenings—they have not the faintest conception of how they are able to
see them. This is no more strange than would be the case of a man who witnessed 120 a moving
picture for the first time, and who was ignorant of the mechanism involved in the showing of the
picture, the existence of the film, etc.,—such a man would simply know that he "saw" the things,
and he might even believe that he was gazing upon an actual scene in real life.

Degrees of Clairvoyant Vision.

There is, of course, many degrees of power and development among clairvoyants of this class;
and as a result we have many varying degrees of correctness in their readings. Some have merely
a glimpse, as through dim glasses; and some obtain merely distorted reflections similar to those
of a scene reflected into the troubled waters of a lake. Others see far more clearly; but it is
reserved for the trained occultist to read the records as he would read the scene before him on the
physical plane. The clairvoyant does not become infallible simply by reason of the perhaps only
faint awakening of his clairvoyant vision—he is not suddenly gifted with omniscience, as some
seem to suppose. There are almost always elements of error or imperfect visioning, except
among the advanced adepts of the occult world.

"The Memory of Nature."

A celebrated occultist says concerning the point just raised: "Comparatively few accounts of
persons possessing this faculty of looking into the past are to be found in the literature of the
subject, and it might therefore be supposed to be much less common than prevision, or future-
time clairvoyance. I suspect, however, that the truth is rather that it is 121 much less commonly
recognized. It may easily happen that a person may see a picture of the past without recognizing
it as such, unless there happens to be in it something which attracts special attention, such as a
figure in armor, or in antique costume. It is probable that occasional glimpses of these reflections
of the Akashic Records are commoner than the published accounts would lead us to believe. As
usual, we find examples of all degrees of the power to see into this 'memory of Nature,' from the
trained man who can consult the record for himself at will, down to the person who gets nothing
but occasional vague glimpses, or has even perhaps had only one such glimpse. But even the
man who possesses this faculty only partially and occasionally may still find it of the deepest
interest.

Involuntary Clairvoyance.

"The psychometrist, who needs an object physically connected with the past in order to bring it
all into life again around him; and the crystal-gazer who can sometimes direct his less certain
astral telescope to some historic scene of long ago, may both derive the greatest enjoyment from
the exercise of their respective gifts, even though they may not always understand exactly how
their results are produced, and may not have them fully under control under all circumstances. In
many cases of the lower manifestation of these powers we find that they are exercised
unconsciously; many a crystal-gazer watches scenes from the past without ever realizing that he
is in effect psychometrizing the various objects around him as he happens to touch them or stand
near them. It would be well for all 122 students to bear in mind that occultism is the apotheosis of
common sense, and that every vision that comes to them is not necessarily a picture from the
Akashic Records, nor every experience a revelation from on high. It is far better to err on the side
of healthy scepticism than that of over-credulity; and it is an admirable rule never to hunt for an
occult explanation of anything when a plain and obvious physical one is available. Our duty is to
keep our balance always, and never to lose our self-control, but to take a reasonable, common-
sense view of whatever may happen to us."

Future Time Clairvoyance.

In what is known technically as Future Time Clairvoyance, we have the manifestation of the
clairvoyant vision in the direction of scenes and events of the future. In this phase of
clairvoyance the seer perceives the events and scenes of future time just as if they were present
before him at that very moment. This phase of clairvoyance is far rarer and more uncommon
than any of the other phases. In fact, it is so seldom met with in its perfection that its
manifestation is a matter of greatest interest to those who make a study of the subject. It
occasionally occurs in flashes, and can not be produced at will by the ordinary clairvoyant.
Unfortunately, its very rarity and uncommonness cause it to be counterfeited and imitated by
unprincipled persons.

Seeing What Has Not Yet Happened.

The student who reasons carefully and logically usually meets with what to him, at least at first,
123 seems to be an unsurmountable obstacle in the way of a rational explanation of Future Time
Clairvoyance—when it comes to an understanding of how anyone can expect to see, or can really
see, that which has never happened, he throws up his hands in despair. But, in this as in all the
other phases of clairvoyant phenomena, there is found a reason and cause, although it requires
some subtle thinking to find it, and to grasp it even when it is found. Let us see what are the
highest teachings on this subject, as announced by the careful thinkers along the lines for many
centuries.

Simple Prevision.

There is a phase of prevision, or prophecy of coming events, however, that is not true
clairvoyance at all, but simply the subconscious workings of the mind along the lines of a
supernormal perception of the laws of cause and effect. Give the active subconscious mental
faculties the perception of a strong existing cause, and it will often reason out the probable effect
(the almost certain effect, in fact) of that cause, even though that effect lies in the mist of the
future. The subconscious mind works upon the principle that "coming events cast their shadows
before." But this, at the best, is not true clairvoyance—it is merely the statement of "probable"
results, and effects of existing causes, wonderfully exact and clear though the deduction may be
in some cases. But a thousand-and-one unforeseen things may arise to completely upset the
prediction, or deduction, for it is never actually true until it occurs. We must look further for real
instances of Future Clairvoyance.

The Nature of Time.

124

That eminent scientist, Sir Oliver Lodge, offers an ingenious and interesting, though very
technical explanation of this class of clairvoyant phenomena as follows: "Time is but a relative
mode of regarding things; we progress through phenomena at a certain definite pace, and this
subjective advance we interpret in an objective manner, as if events moved necessarily in this
order and at this precise rate. But that may be only one mode of regarding them. The events may
be in some sort of existence always, both past and future, and it may be we who are arriving at
them, not they which are happening. The analogy of a traveler in a railway train is useful; if he
could never leave the train, nor alter its pace, he would probably consider the landscapes as
necessarily successive, and be unable to conceive their co-existence. We perceive, therefore, a
possible fourth dimensional aspect about time, the inexorableness of whose flow may be a
natural part of our present limitations. And if we once grasp the idea that past and future may be
actually existing, we can recognize that they may have a controlling influence on all present
action, and the two together may constitute the 'higher plane' or totality of things after which, it
seems to me, we are impelled to seek, in connection with the directing of form or determinism,
and the action of human beings consciously directed to a definite and preconceived end."

The Oriental Teaching.

The Hindus, and other oriental peoples, however, have a clearly defined and positive explanation
of 125 the phenomena of Future Time Clairvoyance, which must be included in our consideration
of the subject, even though it does involve certain metaphysical or philosophical conceptions
which are apart from our present inquiry as conducted in this book. The oriental theory is based
upon that basic conception of the eastern philosophies which hold that the beginning, duration,
and ending of any particular one of the infinitude of successive universes created by the Supreme
Being, is to that Being but as a single moment of time; or, as the celebrated Hindu proverb runs:
"The creation, duration, and destruction of a universe is but the time of the twinkling of an eye to
Brahman." In other words, that to the Supreme Being, all the past, all the present, all the future of
the universe, must be as but a single thought in a single moment of time—an instantaneous act of
consciousness.

The Eternal Now.

A writer on this subject has said: "Those occultists and metaphysicians who have thought long
and deeply upon the ultimate facts and nature of the universe, have dared to think that there must
exist some absolute consciousness—some absolute mind—which must perceive the past, present,
and future of the universe as one happening; as simultaneously and actively present at one
moment of absolute time. They reason that just as a man may see at one moment of his time
some particular event which might appear as a year to some minute form of life and mind—the
microscopic creatures in a drop of water, for instance—so that which seems as a year, or as a
hundred years, to the mind of man, may appear as the happening of a single moment of a higher
scale of time to some exalted Being, or form of consciousness on a higher plane."

Absolute Time

126

The daring flights of metaphysical fancy have resulted in the general acceptance, on the part of
advanced metaphysicians, of the postulate of the existence of an Absolute Mind, independent of
Time and Space, to which everything exists HERE and NOW. To such a mind the entire
sequence of events in the life-history of a universe would appear as a single unit of conscious
experience—an infinitesimal point of time in Eternity. The human imagination staggers at the
idea, but logical thought finally posits it as an unescapable conclusion of extended thought. This,
possibly, is the secret of Future Time Clairvoyance, Prevision, Second Sight, etc.

The Occult Hypothesis.

But it must not be supposed that the oriental occultists hold for a moment the theory that the
clairvoyant actually obtains access to the Divine Mind or Absolute Mind, when he experiences
this vision of future events—their idea is very different from this. These occultists teach that the
phenomena of each plane are reflected with more or less clearness upon the substance of the
planes beneath it. This being so, it is readily seen that the seer who is able to contact with any of
the higher planes of being might thereupon see the reflection, more or less clear, or more or less
distorted, of that which is present in its completeness on the highest plane of all. This is a mere
hint at the quite complicated occult teaching on this subject; but the capable 127 thinker will be
able to work out the full theory for himself in his own way. The important fact is that Future
Time Clairvoyance is a reality—that it is a matter of actual experience of the race, and one that
has been authenticated by the investigations of such learned bodies as the Society for Psychical
Research, of England, and other societies of the same kind in different lands. Future Time
Clairvoyance, Second Sight, Prevision, etc., are facts as fully accepted by such societies as are
the facts of telepathy.

"The Prophecy of Cazotte."

Students of history are familiar with the numerous recorded instances of marvelous prophecy of
future events, wonderful predictions of events to come, which have been fully corroborated and
verified by subsequent events. We lack the space in this book to record more than one of the
most celebrated of these historical prophecies, namely the Prophecy of Cazotte. We have thought
it advisable to reproduce the story of this celebrated prophecy, as told by La Harpe, the French
writer, who was present upon the occasion. It may be mentioned that the fact of this prophecy,
and its literal fulfilment, is a part of French history. The time was just previous to the French
Revolution, and the tale as told by La Harpe is as follows:

The Dinner of the Elect.

"It appears as but yesterday, and yet, nevertheless, it was at the beginning of the year 1788. We
were dining with one of the brethren at the Academy—a man of considerable wealth and genius.
The 128 conversation became serious; much admiration was expressed on the revolution of
thought which Voltaire had effected, and it was agreed that it was his first claim to the reputation
he enjoyed. We concluded that the revolution must soon be consummated; that it was
indispensable that superstition and fanaticism should give way to philosophy, and we began to
calculate the probability of the period when this should be, and which of the present company
should live to see it. The oldest complained that they could hardly flatter themselves with the
hope; the younger rejoiced that they might entertain this very probable expectation; and they
congratulated the Academy especially for having prepared this great work, and for having been
the rallying point, the centre, and the prime mover of the liberty of thought.

The Illuminatus.

"One only of the guests had not taken part in all the joyousness of this conversation, and had
even gently and cheerfully checked our splendid enthusiasm. This was Cazotte, an amiable and
original man, but unhappily infatuated with the reveries of the Illuminati. He spoke, and with the
most serious tone, saying: 'Gentlemen, be satisfied; you will all see this great and sublime
revolution, which you so much desire. You know that I am a little inclined to prophecy; I repeat,
you will see it.' He was answered by the common rejoinder: 'One need not be a conjurer to see
that.' He answered: 'Be it so; but perhaps one must be a little more than conjurer for what
remains for me to tell you. Do you know 129 what will be the consequences of this revolution—
what will be the consequences to all of you, and what will be the immediate result—the well-
established effect—the thoroughly recognized consequences to all of you who are here present?'

The Beginning of the Prophecy.

"'Ah,' said Condorcet, with his insolent and half-suppressed smile, 'let us hear—a philosopher is
not sorry to encounter a prophet—let us hear?' Cazotte replied: 'You, Monsieur de Condorcet—
you will yield up your last breath on the floor of a dungeon; you will die from poison, which you
will have taken in order to escape from execution—from poison which the happiness of that time
will oblige you to carry around your person. You, Monsieur de Chamfort, you will open your
veins with twenty-two cuts of a razor, and yet will not die till some months afterward.' These
personages looked at each other, and laughed again. Cazotte continued: 'You, Monsieur Vicq
d'Azir, you will not open your own veins, but you will cause yourself to be bled six times in one
day, during the paroxysm of the gout, in order to make more sure of your end, and you will die in
the night.'

The Shadow of the Guillotine.

"Cazotte went on: 'You, Monsieur de Nicolai, you will die on the scaffold; you, Monsieur Bailly,
on the scaffold; you, Monsieur de Malesherbes, on the scaffold.' 'Ah, God be thanked,' exclaimed
Roucherm, 'and what of I?' Cazotte replied: 'You! you also will die on the scaffold.' 'Yes,' replied
Chamfort, 'but when will all this happen?' Cazotte answered: 'Six years will not pass over, before
all that I have said to you shall be accomplished.' Here I (La Harpe) spoke, saying: 'Here are
some astonishing 130 miracles, but you have not included me in your list.' Cazotte answered me,
saying: 'But you will be there, as an equally extraordinary miracle; you will then be a Christian!'
Vehement exclamations on all sides followed this startling assertion. 'Ah!' said Chamfort, 'I am
comforted; for if we perish only when La Harpe shall be a Christian, we are immortal!'

The Fall of the Great.

"'Then,' observed Madame la Duchesse de Grammont, 'as for that, we women, we are happy to
be counted for nothing in this revolution; when I say for nothing, it is not that we do not always
mix ourselves up with them a little; but it is a received maxim that they take no notice of us, and
of our sex.' 'Your sex, ladies,' said Cazotte, 'your sex will not protect you this time; and you had
far better meddle with nothing, for you will be treated entirely as men, without any difference
whatever.' 'But what, then, are you really telling us of, Monsieur Cazotte? You are preaching to
us the end of the world.' 'I know nothing on that subject; but what I do know is, that you,
Madame la Duchesse, will be conducted to the scaffold, you and many other ladies with you, in
the cart of the executioner, and with your hands tied behind your backs.' 'All! I hope that in that
case I shall at least have a carriage hung in black.' 'No, Madame; higher ladies than yourself will
go, like you, in the common car, with their hands tied behind them.' 'Higher ladies! what! the
princesses of the blood?' 'Yea, and still more exalted personages!' replied Cazotte.
 The Fate of Royalty.

131

"Here a sensible emotion pervaded the whole company, and the countenance of the host was
dark and lowering—they began to feel that the joke was becoming too serious. Madame de
Grammont, in order to dissipate the cloud, took no notice of the last reply, and contented herself
with saying in a careless tone: 'You see, he will not leave me even a confessor!' 'No, madame!'
replied Cazotte, 'you will not have one—neither you, nor any one besides. The last victim to
whom this favor will be afforded will be—' Here he stopped for a moment. 'Well, who then will
be the happy mortal to whom this prerogative will be given?' Cazotte replied: 'It is the only one
which he will have then retained—and that will be the King of France!' This last startling
prediction caused the company to disband in something like terror and dismay, for the mere
mention of such things was akin to treason."

The Fulfillment of the Prophecy.

To appreciate the startling nature of the Cazotte prophecy at the time when it was made, one
needs but to be even slightly acquainted with the position and characteristics of the persons
whose destinies were thus foretold. The amazing sequel to this wonderful prophecy is told by
history—within six years every detail thereof was verified absolutely. The facts are known to all
students of French history of that period, and may be verified by reference to the pages of any
comprehensive history of those times.

Other Historical Instances.

132

To mention but a few other celebrated instances of historic prophecy: George Fox, the pioneer
Quaker Friend, had the clairvoyant faculty well developed, and numerous instances of its
manifestation by him are recorded. For instance, he foretold the death of Cromwell, when he met
him riding at Hampton Court; he said that he felt "a waft of death" around and about Cromwell
—and Cromwell died shortly afterward. Fox also publicly foretold the dissolution of the Rump
Parliament of England; the restoration of Charles II; and the Great Fire of London. These
prophecies are all matters of history. For that matter, history contains many instances of this
kind, as, for instance, the prophecy of Caesar's death, and its further prevision by his wife. The
Bible prophecies and predictions, major and minor, give us semi-historical instances.

The Eternal Verities.

As a writer has said concerning this phase of clairvoyant phenomena: "This phase of
clairvoyance is very fascinating to the student and the investigator, and is one in which the
highest psychic powers are called into play. There is a reflection here of something even higher
than the psychic plane—there is a glimpse of regions infinitely higher and greater. The student
here begins to realize at least something of the existence of that universal Consciousness 'in
which we live, and move, and have our being'; and of the existence of the reality of the Eternal
Now, in which past, present, and future are blended as one fact of infinite consciousness. He sees
here the signboard pointing to the eternal verities!"

133

PART VI
MEDIUMSHIP

Among the higher categories of Nature's Finer Forces is included that which is popularly known
as "mediumship." Although this term has suffered more or less by reason of its misappropriation
by certain charlatans and the unprincipled exploiters of sincere investigators of the phenomena of
the higher planes of existence, and also by reason of a certain prejudice against the term arising
from misrepresentation and general misunderstanding, the term still remains a perfectly
legitimate one and one clearly indicating the nature of the general class of phenomena sought to
be embraced within its limits. Therefore there is no valid reason for its rejection in our
consideration of the subject of Nature's Finer Forces in this book; and, accordingly, it is used
here in a general way, although the more scientific term "higher plane communication," or
similar terms, are employed herein in some cases.

What Is Mediumship?

Let us see just what is meant by the term "mediumship." The term "medium" is defined as: "That
which lies in the middle, or between other 134 things: hence, that through which anything is
conveyed from one thing to another." In a special sense, a "medium" is "a person serving as the
channel of communication between decarnate entities and human being still in the flesh," in
"spiritualistic phenomena." The suffix "ship," of course, denotes state or office; and in the case
of "mediumship" it indicates that the designated person possesses the state or office of a
"medium," the latter term being used in the special meaning above defined.
Of course, the term "mediumship," as above defined, lacks a clear meaning unless the term
"spiritualistic," or "spiritualism" be defined. The term "spiritualism" (or as many of the best
authorities prefer to state it, "spiritism") is applied to "a system of communication with the
unseen world, or with the inhabitants thereof, the latter being usually known as 'spirits,' through
persons called 'mediums,' which has attained popular favor in Europe and America since about
1850." Or, as another authority states it, "Spiritualism is a term employed to indicate the belief
that departed spirits hold intercourse with mortals by means of psychical phenomena, commonly
through a person of special susceptibility called a 'medium.'"

Ancient Mediumship.

It is, of course, unnecessary to state in detail the fact that communication with decarnate entities
has been known and practiced by the human race from the earliest days of recorded history, and
probably long before that time, and is far from being a modern discovery. Moreover, such
communication has been known and practiced by races of human beings 135 other than those
inhabiting Europe and America—particularly in the oriental countries. In the oriental lands such
communication has been well established for many thousand years, and the most ancient records
give evidences of it. The Hebrew Scriptures contain many instances of such communication,
showing that the same was an accepted fact of the life of the race at the time and in the places at
which these records were written.

Mediumship and Religious Belief.

The careful student will of course notice that this communication with the higher planes of life
and being—this so-called "mediumship"—does not depend upon any particular form of religious
belief, or teaching, concerning the nature of the state or place of abode of the departed spirits of
men; but, on the contrary, is common to all form of religion and to all phases of belief in the
survival of the human soul. Therefore, a scientific consideration of the general subject does not
necessitate the acceptance of any one particular phase of religious belief, or of any particular
system of teaching concerning the nature or state of "life after death." All that is required of the
person accepting the general fact of "higher plane communication" may be stated as follows: (1)
Acceptance of the fact that the human soul persists after the death of the body, and independent
of and removed from the dead body; (2) acceptance of the fact that the decarnate souls of human
beings may, and do, establish communication with human beings still dwelling upon the earth-
plane of existence.
We may state here that the term "decarnate" 136 means "away from the physical body," or "out of
the flesh;" the term being the opposite of "incarnate," meaning "clothed with flesh, or embodied
in flesh." We may also state here that the teachings of most philosophies of the life after death
hold that the decarnate human soul is not entirely devoid of a body, but rather occupies a body
composed of some ethereal substance; this ethereal body being called the "astral body," or the
"spiritual body."

The Ideals of Modern Spiritualism.

A writer well expresses the ideals of modern western spiritualism as follows: "Through the
gateway of mediumship for upwards of fifty years the world has been catching glimpses of the
glory of the land immortal, and visitants from that 'bourne' from whence it has been erroneously
said that 'no traveler returns' have made their presence known beyond all doubt or denial, thus
proving the continued conscious existence of human beings and the sequential chapter of the life
hereafter. Though the messages from the unseen have at times been imperfect and fragmentary,
still they have been messages. If but telegraphic dispatches, so to speak, instead of voluminous
letters; or like telephonic snatches of conversation rather than face-to-face outpourings of
thought and feeling, still they have been greetings and comforting assurances of undying
affection from the people living in the land 'beyond the veil.' Although many a sorrowing soul
has longed for further revelation, and regretted the inability of the spirits to comply with the
requests for fuller information, still the gates have been ajar, and sometimes it has truly seemed
as though they 137 had been flung wide open—so clear and consoling were the messages from
the loved ones on the other side of death's valley of shadow. The manifestations of the presence
of spirits and the evidences of their identity, which have been accumulating during all these
years, have solved the 'great secret,' and we know that death is not a cul-de-sac, but a
thoroughfare. The dread of death disappeared altogether with the mists of ignorance, as, through
the gateway of mediumship, the shining presence of ministering spirits, 'our very own dear
departed,' illumined the pathway which we must all tread to our great promotion.

Immortality Demonstrated Through Mediumship.

"'Immortality demonstrated through mediumship' should be inscribed upon the banner of

spiritualism, for the fact of life beyond the incident of death has been proved beyond all
peradventure to millions of intelligent and enlightened people since the new spiritual era was
inaugurated. To mediums—the modern mediators—therefore belong the office and honor of
rolling back the stone from the tomb and establishing faith upon the firm basis of knowledge
(scientifically ascertained and proven) of the continued intelligent existence in the spiritual
realms of those who went forth through the death change into light and liberty 'over there.'
Mediums, as intermediaries, have enabled spirit people to comfort the sad and encourage the
weak; to relieve the doubter and console the bereaved; to confirm the old-world traditions
regarding bygone spirit intervention and revelation, and supplement our hopes and intuitions
with proof palpable. Present 138 day experiences of inspiration and spirit manifestation make
credible and acceptable many things in ancient records which must otherwise have been
discarded as superstitious and false. Spiritualism redeems the so-called 'supernatural' and
'miraculous' occurrences of the Bible, by explaining them and proving the naturalness. The
capability claimed for old-time seers and prophets to see angels and hear voices is now known to
be a natural faculty, which, in certain people, is perfectly normal while it can be induced in
others by the influence of operators in or out of the body. It can also be cultivated to some
degree by most people who care to study the necessary conditions for its development and
exercise. The famine, 'not of bread, nor of water, but of hearing words from the Lord,' and the
loss of 'open vision' of the spirit, which afflicted Christendom for so many years (because of the
blind intolerance of zealots who, in their adherence to the 'letter,' crushed out the sensitives
through whom the 'spirit' might have been revealed), that famine is rapidly passing away, and we
are being fed with the living bread of spiritual inspiration, and are growing strong enough to
welcome the messengers who come to us through the gateway of mediumship from their after-
death home.

The Truth of Personal Survival.

"When once there is established the conviction of the truth of personal survival of our loved
ones, and the actual and satisfactory demonstrations thereof through mediumship (and we know
of no means whereby such evidences can be obtained save through mediumship), we are thrilled
and delighted; 139 and when this conviction is borne upon us and driven home by the evidences,
and the truth of spirit ministry has been realized, nothing can destroy it. The spiritualist stands
upon firm ground—the impregnable rock of ascertained fact. He knows that intercourse between
the two worlds is real, continuous; therefore he is proof against all speculations, denunciations,
and adverse theories. Dogmatic condemnations, 'bogey' cries, charges of fraud against mediums,
fail to move or frighten him. He can 'speak what he knows and testify to what he has seen;' his
positive and affirmative experience and testimony outweigh all the opposition of 'doubting
Thomases' who do not know.
 The Gateway of Mediumship.

"Through the gateway of mediumship the spirits make themselves known in a variety of ways.
There are many phases of mediumistic phenomena, and the student will find that he must be
patient, painstaking, and persevering if he would make sure of his facts. Careful investigation,
possibly prolonged research, under many difficulties and with many discouragements, will be
required, but 'success is certain if energy fail not,' and the results will adequately recompense
him for all sacrifice and struggle! For in the light of the demonstrated fact of continued existence
after death, it is clear that man is even now 'a spirit served by organs'—that consequently the
basis of all religious experience and affirmation is the spiritual consciousness of mankind. There
could be no revelation to man of spiritual truth or moral duty if he were not a spirit possessing
the capabilities of receiving and comprehending, 140 of interpreting and applying, the revelations
and inspirations which appeal to and quicken the inner (and higher) self."

The Mediumistic Character.

The following quotations from eminent modern spiritualists will further serve to illustrate the
accepted general principles of "spirit communication" on the part of western spiritualism. E. W.
Wallis says: "Spiritualism deals with a higher range and a wider field of supersensuous
phenomena than mesmerism, hypnotism, telepathic psychometry, clairvoyance, etc., because the
natural susceptibility of man in these directions is increased and intensified, and exercised upon a
superior plane, when it is utilized by intelligent spirit operators. It is not true that sensitiveness is
confined to those who are diseased, weak of will, neurotic, or hysterical. Those who are
susceptible to psychic influence may be impulsive, warm-hearted, spontaneous, sociable, and not
by any means, or of necessity, weak-minded or vicious." Dr. Dean Clake says: "The word
mediumship, as understood and used by spiritualists, technically speaking, means a susceptibility
to the influence, and more or less control, of decarnated spirits. Physiologically, it means a
peculiar nervous susceptibility to what may be termed the 'psychic force,' which spirits use to
move the mind or body or both, of their mortal instrument. Psychologically, it signifies a passive
or negative state of mind and body which renders a person subject to the positive will-power of
spirits who influence him or her." The spirit control who employed the hand of Stainton Moses,
M.A., to write his thoughts, said: "The mediumistic peculiarity 141 is one of spirit solely, and not
of body, seeing that it occurs in all varieties of physical frames, in the male and in the female; in
the magnetic and in the electric; in the stout and robust as well as in the puny and thin of body; in
the old and in the young; in all conditions and under all circumstances. This alone would lead
you to see that it is not a physical matter; and that conclusion is strengthened for you by the fact
that the gift is perpetuated even after death of the earth body. Those who on your earth have been
mediums retain the gift and use it with us. They are the most frequent visitors to your world; they
communicate most readily; and it is through them that spirits who have not the gift are enabled to
communicate with your earth."

Mediumistic Sensitivity.

Emma Hardinge Britten said: "Whatever that force may be which constitutes the difference
between a 'medium' and a non-medium, it is certainly of a mental and magnetic character—that
is, a combination of the subtle elements of mind and magnetism, and therefore of a psychological
and not of a purely physical character. Whilst the spiritualists of this generation have had no one
to teach them either what spiritual gifts are, or how to use, or how to abuse them, experience has
shown that the conditions under which spiritual phenomena are produced through mediums are
not only helped or hindered by their mental states, but also by the will, magnetism, and mental
states of those who surround them." E. W. Wallis says: "The same laws govern the relations
between the sensitive and the spirit operator as between the hypnotist and his subject.
142 Therefore, mediumship is not necessarily spiritual; it may be of all kinds; there may be
psychical relationship of a high grade and of a low one. There may be messages from beyond
that prove the identity of spirits, and give evidence of the continuity of life, of the survival of
mind, and yet they may not minister to spiritual growth, nor awaken any exalted desire to be of
service to God and man. There may be psychical sympathy and not spiritual fellowship; there
may be spirit intercourse and not that sweet spiritual communion which should be the goal of all
who seek for evidences of life beyond the valley of death. It is no longer possible to regard
mediumship as a supernatural endowment. It is, as regards the psychic susceptibility upon which
it depends, the common property of the race, and is therefore as natural as are the 'gifts' of song
or oratory, or the ability to paint or construct. But as certain gifts and graces are more developed
in some individuals than in others, in like manner the sensitiveness which is called mediumship
is more highly developed (or is capable of such development) in certain peculiarly constituted
persons who may be regarded as supernormally gifted, yet as naturally so as are geniuses in other
directions."

The Higher Vibratory Forces.

The student who has carefully read what we have said in the earlier portions of the present book
regarding the subject of Nature's Finer Forces, and those concerned with "vibrations," and
"planes of being," will be able to harmonize the apparently somewhat conflicting opinions of
those authorities above quoted concerning the nature of mediumship 143 and spirit
communication. In the first place, the student will remember that there exist planes of being
higher and other than our own earth-plane, and that the rate of normal vibration on such planes is
much higher than are those upon our own earth-plane. In the second place, he will remember that
beings dwelling and manifesting on these higher planes are able to communicate only by means
of their higher vibratory rate of manifestation. And, in the third place, he will remember that a
person dwelling on the earth-plane will not ordinarily register and interpret these higher
vibrations of communication; and that it is necessary for such a person to have originally, or else
have developed, the capacity to raise his or her own vibrations to the key necessary to "catch"
these higher vibrations. In short, we have here once more another instance of that "attunement"
between sender and receiver the most common instance of which is the wireless telegraph.

Psychic Attunement.

The entity, or spirit, dwelling on one of the many higher planes of being who wishes to
communicate with persons on earth through a medium, must first select some person capable of
raising his or her own vibratory rate of consciousness to become "in tune" with that of the spirit
himself. Then he must learn to project his own mental vibrations with sufficient intensity and
force to be "caught" by the sensitive perceptive organism of the medium. These things are
beyond the understanding and accomplishment of many decarnate spirits, and unless they are
taught by some one on their own plane of existence they are 144 likely to fail in their attempts to
communicate through a medium on the earth-plane. But at the present time, in view of the great
interest being manifested "over there" in the communication with the earth-plane, an earnest,
persevering spirit will usually have comparatively little difficulty in finding a proper instructor,
and in acquiring the art of "earth-plane communication," as it is called on the spirit plane.

The Development of Mediumship.

As regards the acquirement of mediumship qualities, information and scientific instruction is

much needed, particularly at the present time. In this book we shall endeavor to throw much light
upon this particular matter, and to give such instruction and information in a plain, practical
form. We may begin by reminding the candidate for mediumship that the methods of
development of mediumship are entirely different from those designed to develop ordinary
psychic powers. In the case of development for ordinary psychic power, the person must acquire
the power of concentration in the direction of sensing in his inner consciousness the impressions
coming to him from the outside world, such impressions not being consciously directed to him.
He must be able to so concentrate that he will be keenly sensitive to these impressions, and to
interpret them intelligently. On the contrary, the person wishing to develop the power of
mediumship must learn to develop the power of negative receptivity to the vibrations coming
from the spirit planes. As has well been said, he is the acted upon, and not the actor. 145 While he
requires concentration, patience, and perseverance in developing the power to raise himself to
the proper vibratory key, when the actual work of communication begins he must passively
allow himself to speak and act, more or less unconsciously, under the guidance, direction, and
control of the communicating spirit.

Unconscious Mediumship.

The student will do well, however, to remember that as a popular writer has said: "It must not,
however, be supposed that spirit influence is limited to, and exerted solely upon, those who are
known to be mediums; or that the spirits do not assist those who use their own psychic faculties.
It is probable that all people who are psychically sensitive and open to impressions are indebted
to spirit helpers, whether they are conscious of the fact or not. There is undoubtedly a greater
degree of influx from the spirit side than even spiritualists are aware. Many persons are indebted
to spirit friends for spontaneous impulses, which, while those persons act upon them and reap the
consequences, they can neither explain nor trace to their source. Spirits frequently associate with
and serve their earth friends, although the recipients of their benefactions are unaware of the fact.
There would be very much more of this kind of guidance from the unseen, if, instead of being
frightened, or repellant in their mental attitude toward the spirits, the great bulk of people were
prepared to accept such assistance from the other side as perfectly natural and to be expected."

Mediumship and Individuality.

146

The student will find it desirable to acquaint himself with the best opinions concerning the
possible or probable effects of the practice of mediumistic powers upon the medium himself.
There is evidenced a disposition in certain quarters to hold to the idea that mediumship, or
control by spirits, is more or less injurious, mentally or physically or both, to the medium. It is
also frequently asserted that the medium tends to lose his individuality and personal strength of
character. Again, there are some who would teach that the medium should be of a low order of
intelligence, and should beware of exercising his intellect, the idea seeming to be that under
these conditions the mental path will be freer and clearer for the spirit control. All of the
aforesaid notions are erroneous, as will appear as we progress in the statements in this book
concerning true and efficient mediumship.

Co-operation of Medium and Spirits.

The medium who observes certain simple and plain rules and habits of conduct will not suffer
any loss of strength of character or individuality from his exercise of his mediumistic power; on
the contrary, an intelligent exercise of the power of mediumship often tends to develop the
intellectual power of the medium. As to the idea that the medium must be ignorant, we have but
to call your attention to the fact that many of the most efficient mediums are intelligent, and even
brilliant individuals. As a writer has said: "There may be some mediums who are ignoramuses,
but it is doubtful if 147 there will be any great degree of intelligence or great spiritual
illumination presented through their agency. It is possible that some mediums act foolishly when
in their normal state, for the purpose of accentuating the difference between their ordinary and
supernormal conditions of mental activity; but there is a more rational, intelligent, and, indeed, a
more spiritual conception of the relations which should exist between mediums and their spirit
guides, which is rapidly finding favor with thoughtful mediums and spiritualists alike. The
proper method of communing with the spirits of the unseen realm is conducive to good, and not
evil, to the medium. The co-operative association of medium and spirit on the plane of thought
and purpose, emotion and motive, ethics and inspiration, results in the education and elevation of
the medium."

Mediumship Not Dangerous.

The following additional quotations from spiritualistic writers on this point, serve to throw
important light on this subject. J. J. Morse says: "Andrew Jackson Davis, Hudson Tuttle, and
other writers, if I correctly understand them, claim that mediumship is a constitutional condition,
and depends upon nervous adaptation, i.e., 'sensitiveness' and the quickening of the subjective
(psychical) faculties; and, personally, my own firm conviction is that there is nothing dangerous
in mediumship. The mere dabbling in mediumship, as either the means of a new sensation, or for
the gratification of personal vanity, is to be thoroughly deprecated, as a perversion of some of the
most wonderful possibilities of our natures; while the prosecution of mediumship, 148 or
anything else, to the detriment of mind, nerves, or health, in any direction, is a sin against
oneself, and will inevitably call down the resultant penalties of physical and mental deterioration.
I have many times advised inquirers who wished to know how to develop mediumship, unless
they desired to do so for serious use, and within proper limits, not to seek its development at all.
And in cases where I could see it would prove personally detrimental, I have strongly advised the
inquirer to let the matter entirely alone."
Wallis says: "Very much depends upon the objects entertained by the medium and the sitters, as
also upon the character and intentions of the spirit who seeks to manifest his presence; but, on
general lines, where people of average intelligence and rectitude seek communion with those
they have known and esteemed, or loved, the results are almost invariably beneficial. There is
every reason why this should be so if the common-sense precautions are observed of keeping a
level head, exercising patience, exhibiting unselfishness and sincerity, and desiring good spiritual
counsel and fellowship."
A. Morton says: "Elevated spirits do not require mediums to surrender their reason; on the
contrary, they advise that every new thought should be tested in the crucible of reason, and that it
be rejected if not in accordance therewith; but the control of domineering spirits, claiming the
name of celebrities, who present unreasonable theories, and in a dictatorial 'thus saith the spirit'
manner, demanding unquestioning compliance with their commands, must be rejected by all
mediums as debasing and inconsistent with self respect. Any associations or concessions which
have a tendency to lower the spiritual standard must be carefully avoided, for there is no growth
149 in any relations which can only be maintained by the sacrifice of self-respect and self-
justice."

Rational Mediumship.

Wallis says: "The rational course for mediums and inquirers to follow is assuredly that of
avoiding the extremes alike of credulity and sceptical incredulity, by letting the spirits do their
best and then collating the facts observed and drawing conclusions. Care, patience, and
perseverance will save both mediums and inquirers from many misconceptions and enable them
to avoid the errors of others. Above all, mediums should observe their own feelings, study their
own experiences, try to understand and co-operate with the spirits, but never yield servile or
slavish service, nor permit themselves to be swayed by flattery nor dominated by any spirit (in
the circle or on the spirit side) who claims obedience, poses as an 'authority,' or refuses to
recognize the rights of others. No medium should remain ignorant, or refrain from giving effect
to his (or her) natural desire for knowledge and self-improvement under the erroneous idea that
he does not need to think, study, or learn, because he is a medium; and that the spirits will
provide and teach through him all that is required. On the other hand, while thoughtfully
observant of favorable conditions, and intelligent in self-study and culture, the medium should
avoid 'getting up' certain subjects, or thinking along certain lines with the purpose and
expectation that such information will be employed while under control. Such action, proceeding
from a wrong motive, cannot fail to injure the psychic relations between the spirit and the
medium, and 150 will render the work of control doubly hard, because such thoughts will have to
be cleared away before those of the spirit can be transferred to, and have free course through, the
medium."

The "Home Circle."

Mediums are born or made. That is to say, many persons are born with the gift of mediumship,
while others, lacking this natural power, are able to develop the power by practice and gradual
unfoldment. Some of the world's best mediums have been developed, while others in the same
class have been born with the gift. At the same time, it must be remembered that there is a wide
range of power existing between different individual mediums of both of these classes. In the
opinion of the present writer, perhaps the very best way of developing mediumistic powers is
that of actually participating in "circle work." The wonderful results of earlier spiritualism in
America and in Europe were undoubtedly due to the casual and general practice of holding
"home circles." These home circles were the nursery of some of the world's greatest mediums.
Here the born medium was made aware of his or her natural powers; and, likewise, here others
were enabled to gradually unfold and develop their latent mediumistic power.

The Cure for Fraudulent Mediumship.

At the present time we have too few mediums, and this fact is attributable largely to the gradual
discontinuance of the home circles. Present time folks are too fond of having everything worked
out and presented to them, and they flock to the sensational 151 public demonstrations, some of
which are undoubtedly "faked" in order to meet the public demand for sensational features; and
at the same time the honest, careful, conscientious mediums are often overlooked, and the home
circles almost unknown. Many so-called investigators of spiritualism are feverishly anxious to
"see something," and are impatient and the comparatively slow order of developments at the
home circle or at the careful mediumistic circles. Many earnest spiritualists lament the present
tendency, and predict that in time there will be an almost complete dearth of honest, careful
mediums, owing to the demand for "quick action" and the temptation to furnish fraudulent
counterfeits of the genuine phenomena resulting from this feverish public demand.

Warning to Young Mediums.

Wallis says concerning this point: "After a time, as the development progresses, the medium and
his spirit friends may be strong enough to undertake public work without the assistance and
protection of a circle, in the same manner as did D. Home, Slade, Eglinton, and other noted
public mediums; but they should be in no hurry about doing so, and they need to be very self-
possessed and level-headed to hold their own against the 'phenomena hunters' on the one side
(who sap the very life of the sensitive), and the know-all, conceited sceptics on the other side
(who freeze up all the psychic conditions), and before whom it is worse than foolish to cast these
pearls of great price.
"The lot of the public 'physical,' 'test,' and 'clairvoyant' medium is not to be envied or lightly
chosen. 152 Such sensitives frequently suffer a martyrdom that none but sensitives can realize.
What with foolish flatterers; the sitters who are never content, but cry 'give, give, give;' the
injudicious friends, who seeing the exhaustion of the worn-out mediums, in mistaken sympathy
urge them to take stimulants (instead of securing them rest and change of surroundings), they
have a hard road to travel, and our sincerest sympathy goes out to them all. We plead for them.
We bespeak kindly and human consideration. Too frequently they are tried and condemned
unheard. They are expected to prove that they are not frauds, instead of, as in other cases, being
accepted as reputable people. So much has this been the case that some mediums of
unquestioned power have retired into private life and business pursuits, where they meet with the
respect and recognition which were denied them while they were public workers in the ranks of
spiritualism.
"Let us not be misunderstood. In saying this we are not apologizing for, or palliating fraud or
wrong doing, but merely asking for fair and considerate treatment—not hasty, unreasoning
condemnation. While it is true that mediumship has many compensations, and the medium who
takes pleasure in his work has many pleasant experiences, it is also true that the professional
medium is too frequently subjected to treatment which makes his task more difficult and
thankless than it need be. The kindly and appreciative treatment which he receives from some
sitters is a welcome stimulus, and affords good conditions for the spirits, who are thus enabled to
operate to the best advantage."

153

PART VII
MEDIUMISTIC CONDITIONS

Mediumistic phenomena, i.e., the phenomena by and through which spirits manifest their
presence and demonstrate their power, may be broadly classified under two heads, as follows, (1)
physical phenomena, and (2) mental phenomena.

Physical Phenomena.

Physical Phenomena cover a wide range of mediumistic manifestations, among which are
movements of tables, the production of "raps," the manifestation of spirit lights, freedom from
the effects of fire, the passage of matter through matter, direct writing upon paper or upon slates,
direct voices, levitation of the medium, spirit photographs, and the production of the materialized
form of the spirit. While in rare cases the spirits may manifest these forms of physical
phenomena without the assistance of the medium and the circle, nevertheless as a rule such
phenomena are produced by the spirits only through the assistance of a medium, and usually only
when there is gathered together a circle.

"Psychic Force."

154

Various explanations of the power employed by the spirits, assisted by the medium and by the
circle, have been offered by the scientific investigators of the subject. The most generally
accepted theory of the western scientists is that the spirits employ what is called the "psychic
force" of the medium, often assisted by that drawn from the circle and focused in the medium.
The medium is regarded as a psychic storage battery which is freely drawn upon by the
manifesting spirit. The degree and character of the manifestations are determined largely by the
peculiar quality of the psychic force, the capabilities of the medium, the knowledge and powers
of the spirits, and the influence of the sitters.

Human Magnetism.

Dr. Dean Clarke says: "Human magnetism, or nerve aura, is probably the most sublimated form
of ethereal matter, hence nearest in refinement to spirit substance, and therefore spirits use it as
the vehicle of their vibrating forces. Those persons who have an excess of magnetism, of the
proper quality to unite with both the psychic force of spirits and the forces inherent in natural
objects, and thus form an electro-magnetic connection of spirits with the objects they wish to act
upon, are the persons chosen by the spirits for physical mediums. The mind and brain of the
medium are not often nor necessarily controlled, and only his magnetism and psychic forces are
used, through which the spirits transmit the vibrations of their own power to mechanically
produce concussions, or movements of material objects."

"Zoether."

155

Hudson Tuttle (writing under control) gives the following statement of a spirit concerning the
manner in which physical phenomena are produced: "Zoether (psychic force) emanating from
the medium charges the object to be moved, and a band of spirits directs a current of their own
zoethic emanation in the direction they desire the article to move, and it passes along the current
thus produced. The charging of the object by the medium is necessary in order that it may be in a
state of vibration harmonious to the spirit current. If this current be directed against the table or
other charged body, raps or concussions are produced, as a positive and negative relation exists
between the spirits and the medium's zoether. One spirit alone cannot produce physical
manifestations. If one purports to communicate, assistance will be rendered by many others, who
combine their influence."

"Prana."

The orientals account for physical mediumistic phenomena in a similar way, though their terms
are different. Instead of speaking of zoether, or psychic force, they always employ the term
"prana." In the oriental philosophies "prana" is explained as a subtle form of energy permeating
the universe, but manifesting in a special form in the organism of the human being. This subtle
force, or prana, is held to be capable of being transmitted from one organism to another, and is
held to be the energizing power by means of which many forms of occult or magic phenomena
are produced. Prana is very much akin to the "human magnetism" of the western occultists,
156 and the properties attributed to the latter are really those which the orientals for centuries past
have held to be among the essential properties of prana; so, at the last, there is found to be a
practical agreement here between the oriental and the western schools of occultism, respectively,
in spite of their differing terminology.

Mental Phenomena.

Mental Phenomena cover another wide range of mediumistic phenomena, among which may be
mentioned the following, viz., involuntary or automatic writing and drawing, writing by means
of the planchette or "ouija" board or similar mechanical aid to writing, clairvoyant perception of
spirits, clairaudient hearing of spirit voices, prophetic utterances of spirits, impersonating and
inspirational control of the medium. Mediums are frequently so thoroughly "under the influence
or control," especially in private circle seances, that they seem to have been transformed into
another personality. Sometimes the medium through which the spirit is manifesting will have his
facial appearance changed so completely that persons present will recognize in the changed
appearance the looks of the spirit as known when it was in earth life.
 The Value of Phenomena.

The chief value of physical mediumistic manifestations is not, as generally supposed, that of
affording entertainment or food for thought for those witnessing them, but rather that of
affording proof of the possibility of spirit communication, particularly when spirit identity is
established through the 157 manifestation of the phenomena. A writer says of this class of
phenomena: "A good psychographic medium will usually obtain writing between closed slates,
which may be brought by the investigator, who can insist upon their not leaving his sight, and
not even leaving his hand. We have obtained writing on paper that we had previously marked,
which was then covered by our own hand, and a friend's and was untouched by the medium. On
another occasion, a slate which we had personally cleaned was laid on the floor (fully six feet
from the medium) with a small piece of pencil under it (in broad daylight), and on taking it up
shortly afterwards there was found written on the under side a long message of a private nature
from a deceased friend, of whom we were not thinking. Such phenomena as these are still good
and impressive, they cannot be counterfeited under like conditions, and even when no proof of
identity is given in connection with the writings, they point so distinctly to the action of a
discrete, disembodied intelligence as to compel the recognition of their spiritual origin. The
evidential utility of physical phenomena lies in their being inimitable by fraud. Imitations can of
course be made which might satisfy the credible and the gullible, but the conditions for testing
the phenomena we have specially referred to are so simple that no rational investigator need be
deceived; first, to be sure that the slate, paper, or panel to be used is perfectly blank; second, that
it does not leave the hand of the inquirer, or if it does, that it is marked in such a way that there
can be no doubt of its identification when it is returned to him; and thirdly (with paintings), to
observe if the paint be wet, and note the time occupied in their production."

Trance Condition Not Essential.

158

Many persons are under the impression that it is necessary for a medium to go into the trance
condition in order to manifest physical mediumistic phenomena, but such is not the case. While
many mediums do lapse into the trance conditions at such time, it is equally true that many
others do not do so. Some of the very best mediums produce some of the most striking
manifestations while in a perfectly normal, waking condition. A writer says of a well-known
medium: "She constantly receives evidences of the presence of her spirit friends while she is
perfectly normal. We have heard rappings and witnessed movements of physical objects in her
presence, while holding friendly conversation with her, when we have been in a good light.
Frequently, at meal times, the spirits announce their presence by raps, and respond to the
salutations and questions of their medium and other members of the family."
Professor Loveland says: "Many of the best mediums in the world were never entranced in the
sense of being in an unconscious sleep. And it is doubted whether that condition is desirable. The
Fox girls, and most, if not all of the original rapping mediums, were never in the deep sleep
trance. It is not necessary for any of the physical manifestations, and that includes a very large
percentage of all the spirit phenomena. The rappings, tippings, movings, slate writings,
automatic writings, paintings, telegraphing, voices, materializing, etc., can all occur without the
sleep trance, the reason for which is very apparent, as in the production of such phenomena the
spirits simply use the surplus radiated nerve-force of the medium."

Scientific Reports on Phenomena.

159

Sir William Crookes, in speaking of D. D. Home and Euspasia Paladino, said: "Most, if not all,
of the occurrences with Euspasia seem to have taken place when she was in a trance, and the
more complete the trance the more striking the phenomena. This was not always so with Home.
Certainly the two most striking things I ever saw with him, the fire test and the visible forms,
were to be observed while he was entranced, but it was not always easy to tell when he was in
that state, for he spoke and moved about almost as if he were in his normal condition; the chief
differences being that his actions were more deliberate, and his manner and expressions more
solemn, and he always spoke of himself in the third person, as 'Dan.' When he was not in a trance
we frequently had movements of objects in different parts of the room, with visible hands
carrying flowers about and playing the accordion. On one occasion I was asked by Home to look
at the accordion as it was playing in the semi-darkness beneath the table. I saw a delicate looking
female hand holding it by the handle, and the keys at the lower end rising and falling as if fingers
were playing on them, although I could not see them. So lifelike was the hand that at first I said it
was my sister-in-law's, but was assured by all present that both her hands were on the table, a
fact which I then verified for myself."

Phenomena Without Darkness.

"Home always refused to sit in the dark. He said that, with firmness and perseverance, the
phenomena could be got just as well in the light, 160 and even if some of the things were not so
strong, the evidence of one's eyesight was worth making same sacrifices for. In almost all the
seances I had with Home there was plenty of light to see all that occurred, and not only to enable
me to write down notes of what was taking place, but to read my notes without difficulty. Home
was very anxious to let everyone present be satisfied that he was not doing any of the things
himself—too anxious, I sometimes thought, for frequently he would interfere with the progress
and development of what was going on by insisting that some sceptic or other should come
around and take hold of his hands and feet to be sure he was not doing anything himself. At
times, he would push his chair back and move right away from the table when things were
moving on it, and ask those furthest from him to come round and satisfy themselves that he had
nothing to do with the movements. I used frequently to beg him to be quiet, knowing that, if he
would not move about in his eagerness to convince us of his genuineness, the strength of the
phenomena would probably increase to such a degree that no further evidence would be needed
that their production was beyond the powers of the medium.

Test Conditions.

"During the whole of my knowledge of D. D. Home, extending for several years, I never once
saw the slightest occurrence that would make me suspicious that he was attempting to play
tricks. He was scrupulously sensitive on this point, and never felt hurt at anyone taking
precautions against deception. He sometimes, in the early days of our acquaintance, used to say
to me before a seance, 'Now, William, I 161 want you to act as if I were a recognized conjurer,
and was going to cheat you and play all the tricks I could. Take every precaution you can devise
against me, and move about and look under the table or where else you like. Don't consider my
feelings. I shall not be offended. I know that the more carefully I am tested the more convinced
will everyone be that these abnormal occurrences are not of my own doings.' Latterly, I used
jokingly to say to him, 'Let us sit round the fire and have a quiet chat, and see if our friends are
here and will do anything for us. We won't have any tests or precautions.' On these occasions,
when only my family were present with him, some of the most convincing phenomena took
place."

Is Darkness Necessary?

From the above it is seen that not only is the trance condition not absolutely necessary for the
production of striking mediumistic phenomena, but that, also, there is no absolute necessity for
the condition of darkness to be maintained as an essential feature of such phenomena. While
many mediums insist upon the condition of darkness at seances, it is thought by some careful
thinkers that this arises from the fact that such mediums have been accustomed to such
conditions from their earliest days of mediumship, and have grown to believe that the same are
absolutely necessary. It is thought that if such mediums would begin over again, practicing in
full light in the company of a few sympathetic friends, they would before long grow accustomed
to the new conditions, and would then be able to reproduce all of their most important
phenomena in full light. Using the terms of modern psychology, 162 it would seem that such
mediums are the victims of their own "auto-suggestion," and fixed beliefs; and, as all students of
the subject well know, the mental states of the medium have a most important bearing of the
quality of the phenomena produced, and form a very important factor of the conditions
governing the success of the seance.

Developing Circles.

The person who is developing mediumship will do well to surround himself with persons of a
certain type of psychical power, and to form circles of such persons. Such persons are invaluable
in constituting a "developing circle." Such persons need not be mediumistic themselves, nor are
they required to actually do anything. Instead, their service is that of being present as psychical
reservoirs of force upon which the spirits can draw for manifesting power. The medium, being
sensitive to helpful influences, and the reverse, will recognize such persons by the congenial and
harmonious influence they exercise upon him; and he will do well to encourage such persons to
sit in his developing circles.

Impersonating Mediumship.

What is known as "impersonating mediumship" occurs where the medium is so completely under
the control of the manifesting spirit that he will exhibit, often in a marvelously accurate manner,
the personal characteristics and mannerisms of the spirit, and which are readily recognized as
such by the spirit's surviving friends in earth-life. Sometimes the medium will actually re-enact
the dying moments of the controlling spirit. In many cases such impersonations have been so
nearly photographically 163 and phonographically correct that they have afforded the most
convincing proof to investigators, and in other cases have been a great consolation to relatives of
the spirit who have been thus assured that their loved one was still in actual existence on a higher
plane of being. These results, however, are possible only when a very close rapport condition has
been established between the spirit and the medium. In cases in which such a close rapport
condition is obtained, and a high degree of harmony developed, the spirit will be able to
positively establish his identity by causing the medium to utter his exact words, and to give
names, dates, and close details of incidents occurring in his earth life, and often to employ his
exact set phrases and verbal tricks of speech, so as to bring to the consciousness of the sitters the
realization that they are in the actual presence of the decarnate spirit friend.

The Proper Mental Condition.

The young medium, however, should beware against striving too hard to be the instrument of the
phenomena of spirit impersonation. For a too intense anxiety, and desire to please sitters,
frequently tends to produce a cloudy mental state in which the ideas in the mind of the medium
blend with the spirit communication, and thus produces a most unsatisfactory result, and one
which is apt to confuse the minds of the sitters and sometimes actual arouse suspicion that the
medium is trying to practice deception. For this reason the young medium should not seek the
attendance of persons desiring "test seances;" at least, such should be his course until he has
learned not to be carried away with his desire to please or to satisfy such persons attending
164 his circles. He should endeavor to cultivate a mental condition of calmness, and a
determination not to influence or to interfere with the spirit communications in any way
whatsoever, but, instead, to allow himself to become a passive instrument for the
communication. The medium should remember that he is not a dealer in merchandise "warranted
to please," but is, instead, a medium of communication between the spirit and those still in earth-
life.

Demand Proof of Spirit Identity.

A certain degree of care and caution, and the employment of honest powers of discrimination, is
necessary on the part of the sitters in cases of spirit impersonation. This not because of any lack
of honesty on the part of the medium, but because of the habit of a mischievous class of dwellers
on the planes of spirit life to falsely impersonate other spirits as such seances. As all
investigators of the subject know very well, it is not an infrequent thing for such mischievous
and meddlesome spirits to endeavor to pass themselves off as the relative or friends of those in
the circle, or even to falsely impersonate some great historical personages. In such cases the
sitters should insist upon the spirit positively identifying himself, just as they would in case of
doubt regarding a person speaking to them over the telephone and claiming to be such-and-such
a person. And the proof demanded should be similar to that which would be sought from the
suspected telephone talker. An honest spirit communicator does not object to such demands, and
is only too ready to do his best to furnish the right kind of proofs concerning his identity.

The "Trance Condition."

165
The psychic condition frequently attending the demonstration of mediumship powers is usually
spoken of as a "trance," but this term is quite misleading, for it carries with it the suggestion of
an entire loss of consciousness and of a condition of more or less deep sleep. But the
mediumistic trance is seldom a deep sleep condition. Instead, it is the condition similar to that of
a profound "day dream," in which the person is fully awake but in which the consciousness has
been almost entirely taken off the sights and sounds of the outside world. As a writer has well
said: "What is called 'trance mediumship' is seldom of the nature of the deep sleep of entire
unconsciousness. It is more frequently the suspension of the ordinary consciousness of external
surroundings, a temporary oblivion on the outer plane—a semi-conscious state, in fact—in which
the subject does not retain the volitional ability to employ his thinking powers, the latter having
been 'switched off,' so to speak, and the subject responds to the will of the spirit control."

Spirit Inspiration.

Wallis says, concerning the nature of a certain phase of spirit control: "In the case of speaking
mediumship, where general and philosophical ideas are to be transmitted, the control is of a
different order from that exercised for test manifestations. It is more frequently of the nature of
'suggestion.' The spirit suggestionist suggests to the medium a certain train of ideas, and then
stimulates the brain and the organs of expression to do the work of dressing up the thoughts and
giving them utterance. Unless the subject is a scientific or a biographical one, 166 in which
specific terms are required and accurate data are to be imparted, the relationship between the
'inspired' speaker and the spirit control partakes more of the character of the engineer who feeds
the fire and directs the movements of his engine, while the machine does the work, than it does
of the actual voicing of the exact words, embodying in a full and complete fashion the ideas the
spirit wishes to have expressed.

Spirit Suggestion.

"At first the operator may succeed by very imperfectly stimulating the brain of the sensitive and
causing the cerebration and expression of his thoughts. The utterances may bear but a slight
resemblance to what the spirit intended to express. The vocabulary is that of the medium, and the
form in which the speech is cast of necessity partakes of the mold familiar to the sensitive—but,
by continued close association and frequent control of the medium, the operator gains experience
which enables him to exert a more decided influence; and the sensitive, becoming attuned,
responds to and expresses the thoughts of the spirit with greater clearness and precision. Just as
those who dwell together unconsciously approach nearer to each other and acquire a similarity in
their mode of thought and of expressing their ideas (the more dominant personality impressing
itself upon the less positive), so the medium imperceptibly, and very often unconsciously,
acquires facility and proficiency in thought and elocutionary expression as the result of the co-
operation between himself and his spirit guide."

Psychic Attunement.

167

Those who have read the above carefully stated opinion, will begin to see the reason why certain
mediums who have attained the greatest proficiency in certain forms of mediumship, and who
have become what are known as "reliable mediums," almost always have some particular spirit
guide or guides with whom they have become in almost perfect psychic harmony and
attunement. These harmonious spirits are not only enabled to express themselves with a high
degree of clearness and power through their favorite medium, but are also enabled to assist in the
production of the best rapport conditions between other spirits wishing to communicate and the
said medium. There is a certain amount of spiritual and psychic co-operation between spirit and
medium which is attained only by practice and continued association, which results in a psychic
attunement between them. The closer and more harmonious the relationship existing between a
spirit and his medium, the thinner is the veil separating the two planes upon which they dwell.

Automatic Writing.

In that phase of mediumship known as "automatic or inspirational writing," there is manifested

two distinct forms of spirit control of the organism of the medium. In cases of pure automatic
writing the spirit controls the arm and hand muscles of the medium, and uses them to write out
the message under the direct and absolute control of the mind and will of the spirit. Cases have
been known in which both hands of the medium have been so used by the spirit control, each
hand writing a distinct and separate message, and both being performed without 168 any
consciousness of the nature of the message on the part of the medium. In some cases of
automatic writing the medium was engaged in thought about other subjects, or even in reading or
study from a book. This is true not only in cases of automatic writing in which the hand is
directly employed, but also in those in which some mechanical device such as the planchette or
the ouija board intervenes.

Inspirational Writing.

In inspirational writing, on the other hand, the spirit impresses the message upon the mind of the
medium, either as a whole, or else sentence by sentence or even word by word—in all of such
cases, be it noted, the medium is aware of the substance of what he is about to write, either the
word, the sentence, or perhaps the entire message. In such cases, of course, the medium retains
control of his writing muscles and their action, and the spirit control is merely a phase of higher
telepathy, as it were. When the message is impressed upon the mind of the medium word by
word, or sentence by sentence, the style is of course that of the spirit exerting the control; but
where the entire message is impressed upon the mind of the medium, the style is usually a
blending of that of the spirit and that of the medium, for the medium is not likely to remember
the literal message as given him, but merely is conscious of the general purport and meaning
thereof, together with a few phrases or expressions formed by the spirit mind. In such cases, of
course, the personality of the medium enters largely into the message, while in the case of pure
automatic writing the personality of the medium plays no part whatsoever, and the personality of
the spirit is present in its entirety. 169 This important distinction should be noted and
remembered.

Gradual Development of Powers.

Most mediums develop their powers of mediumship gradually, and pass through a number of
stages in their development of power. At first they may obtain only raps, or possibly the tilting or
movement of tables. Then, very likely, they are moved to write, either automatically or else
inspirationally. Later they experience the impulse to allow the spirit control to speak through
their vocal organism, but it is seldom that the spirit is able to do this at first trial, as the medium
is not as yet sufficiently sensitized or attuned to the spirit, and, instead, they can but gurgle, gasp,
and make inarticulate sounds, or else shout, laugh, cry, or sing, and possibly jabber some strange
jargon or unknown tongue, or else simply utter a series of sounds lacking in definite meaning.
Later, the inarticulate sound is succeeded by definite sentences—perhaps a message, or a short
address. Sometimes the spirit control will endeavor to relate some of his earth-life experiences,
or perhaps even to give an impersonation manifestation. Often several different spirits strive to
manifest through the developing medium, taking turns as manifestation, holding the control for
only a few minutes and then giving place to his successor.

Spirit Guides.

As the development proceeds, it will be found that one or two particular spirits will manifest a
greater power than the others, and after establishing a strong degree of harmony and attunement
they will assume the position of "guides" to the medium, and 170 will accordingly begin to work
in his interests on their side of life, and to accept or reject other spirits who seek to manifest
through their medium. At this stage, the medium is often sufficiently advanced to be used as the
channel for fuller and more complete manifestations, particularly in the direction of inspirational
speaking. Often the medium in this stage of development is also able to manifest psychic powers
which were formerly beyond his ability, as for instance psychometry, clairvoyance, etc. Then if
his spirit guides be sufficiently advanced and powerful, and the medium be sufficiently receptive
and harmonious to their influences, they will educate him to such an extent that he will be able,
with their assistance, to become an instrument for the production of still higher forms of
mediumistic phenomena. But the development is almost always gradual and proceeds by
successive and well-defined steps and stages.

No Loss of Individuality.

In concluding this part of our book, we would call your attention to the following statements
made by writers along the lines of spiritualism in the leading journals of that school of modern
thought. The first writer says: "There is no need for the medium to decline to be influenced or
controlled, by spirit friends for fear of losing his 'individuality,' any more than he should insist
upon asserting his freedom and refuse the aid of tutors, lest they should infringe upon his sacred
'individuality.' What are called the unconscious phases of mediumship generally lead up to
loving co-operation with the wise and kindly souls of the higher life in efforts to establish the
fellowship of man; to bring knowledge 171 where ignorance now reigns; to banish the darkness
by the light of that spiritual communion which shall yet be a blessing to the race; and reliance
upon higher powers in or out of the body does not mean that we sacrifice our own abilities, nor
do we thus become exempt from responsibility. Quite the reverse. It is the arrogance of
individualism against which we protest. In fact, there is no abiding strength of purpose apart
from the dependence every well-ordered mind should accord to the Infinite Light and Wisdom
and the beneficial services which His wise and loving ministering spirits can render to us if we
are desirous and responsive."
 Mediumship Beneficial.

A second writer says: "There is no reason why the reactive consequences of frequent control by
enlightened and earnest spirits, even in the case of the 'trance' medium, should not prove
extremely beneficial to the sensitive, and this, we believe, has been the case with many of the
speakers in the spiritualistic movement. Where the medium is inspirational and ready to respond
to the thought impulsations of the control, it stands to reason that the transmitted ideas, and the
stimulation of the thought-faculties caused by the transference and expression of the spirits'
opinions, will not be lost to the medium. 'If you will take one step we can more easily help you
to take a second than we could compel you to take the first if you were unprepared,' said a spirit
teacher to Mrs. Emma Hardinge Britten, and there need be no loss of dignity or individuality, no
injury to body or mind, but a gain of strength and spiritual vigor, education of mind and
stimulation of moral purpose, by intelligent co-operation 172 and temporary surrender on the part
of the medium to wise and loving spirit helpers and teachers."

Mediumship and The Bible.

A third writer, Rev. H. E. Haweis, says in connection with the relation of spiritualism with
religion: "People now believe in the Bible because of spiritualism; they do not believe in
spiritualism because of the Bible. Take up your Bible and you will find that there is not a single
phenomenon which is recorded there which does not occur at seances today. Whether it be lights,
sounds, the shaking of the house, the coming through closed doors, the mighty rushing winds,
levitation, automatic writing, the speaking in tongues, we are acquainted with all these
phenomena; they occur every day in London as well as in the Acts of the Apostles. It is
incontestable that such things do occur, that in the main the phenomena of spiritualism are
reliable, and happen over and over again, under test conditions, in the presence of witnesses; and
that similar phenomena are recorded in the Bible, which is written for our learning. It is not an
opinion, not a theory, but a fact. There is chapter and verse for it, and this is what has
rehabilitated the Bible. The clergy ought to be very grateful to spiritualism for this, for they
could not have done it themselves. They tried, but they failed."

173

PART VIII
HOW TO DEVELOP MEDIUMSHIP

Anyone is entitled to be considered a "medium" if he or she is psychically sensitive and capable

of receiving and responding to spirit control or influence. Likewise, anyone is entitled to the
designation who is capable of so generating freely a sufficient quantity of "psychic force,"
magnetism, prana, or whatever other name we may choose to apply to the force which is
generated in the human organism and is capable of being employed by the spirits in order to
produce mediumistic phenomena of the class usually referred to as "physical phenomena." As we
have seen, the spirits themselves are not usually able to manufacture or generate by themselves
this psychic required to produce the said phenomena, but, on the contrary, must depend upon
mediumistic individuals for such force.

Who Are Mediumistic?

Many persons are more or less naturally sensitive to spirit influence, and therefore mediumistic.
In many cases these persons tend to take on the psychic 174 conditions of others, both those in
earth life and those on the spirit plane of existence, without realizing the nature of the influence
operating on them. Such persons are frequently more or less erratic, and are considered as
"flighty" by their friends. They need instruction on the subject of psychic laws and self-control,
so that they may intelligently guard themselves against undesirable influences, and at the same
time cultivate the power of mediumship of the desirable kind. It has been asserted that "everyone
is a medium," and in a way this is true, for practically every person is more or less sensitive to
spirit influence, and is capable of being developed into an efficient medium of communication
with the spirit world. But it is equally true that only a certain percentage of persons possess the
true spiritual qualities requisite for the highest phases of true mediumship. That is to say, but few
persons are fitted temperamentally and spiritually for the higher tasks of mediumship. We think
it safe to say, however, that where a person is filled with a burning desire to become a true
medium, and feels within himself or herself a craving of the soul for development along these
lines, then that person may feel assured that he or she has within his or her soul the basic
qualities required for true mediumship, and that these may be developed by the proper methods.

The Mediumistic Temperament.

A leading writer on the subject of mediumship has said: "It is a fundamental proposition that
sensitiveness, or the capability of mediumship, is a faculty common to mankind, differing in
degree—as hearing and sight are common heritages, but keener in some individuals than in
others; or, under certain conditions, 175 it may disappear." What is called "the mediumistic
temperament" is frequently marked self-consciousness and shrinking from public criticism, and a
diffidence which causes the person to wish to be out of the range of the observation of strangers
and those not sympathetic to them; on the other hand, however, there are other forms of the
"mediumship temperament" which is marked by a nervous, almost hysterical, self assertiveness
and desire for public notice and attention. Persons of either of these phases of this temperament,
however, have the common quality of being extremely sensitive to sneers and slights, adverse
criticism and oppositions, while ridicule drives them almost beside themselves. Likewise they
are nearly always found to be enthusiastic and earnest workers when their interests and
sympathies are aroused; as a writer has said "they are almost invariably emotional, enthusiastic,
spontaneous, and ardent." And, as another writer has said they are usually "generous and
impulsive, hot-headed and independent, close friends with warm hearts; too sensitive to criticism
of an unkind nature, too easily pleased by praise; without malice, without revengeful thoughts."
A striking feature of this temperament may be summed up in the phrase, "hungry for sympathy
and understanding."

Is Mediumship Desirable?
While it is true that a vast majority of persons possess the mediumistic power, latent and
dormant, and capable of being developed to a greater or less active power, it is but honest to say
that in many cases it is a grave question whether the person would be justified in undertaking the
hard work, and long 176 time, required to develop himself for the minor success which would
attend his efforts. As a writer has said: "Does the prospective result justify the labor involved to
bring these powers into efflorescence? My impression is, that in at least three cases out of four,
the time and labor it would take to develop this latent quality to its greatest efficacy would be far
in excess of its value when so developed." But, as we have already said, the best indication is
found in the "call" to develop his or her latent powers which the true medium always
experiences.

Developing the Natural Power.

A writer on this subject well says: "Just as a drum or tamborine is incapable of being made to
emit a tithe of what can be produced by means of a piano or a violin, in the way of music, so the
differences in quality and conditions of the physical organisms, and in the degree of nervous and
psychical sensibility of those who desire mediumship, render it improbable that any but a small
proportion will develop such extreme susceptibility to spirit influence as will repay them for the
time and self-sacrifice involved in the cultivation of their powers. Further, it should be borne in
mind that while wise spirits are ever ready to respond to the call of the earnest aspirant for
spiritual truth, as wise spirits they are not likely to devote themselves to the preparation of an
instrument that would be inefficient for their purpose. The nervous system of the medium,
whatever his phase may be, has to be trained to respond to the will and the psychic force of the
controlling spirit, just as much as the muscles of the musician or artist, and 'practice makes
perfect' 177 in the one case as well in the other. Since mediumship is a strictly natural
qualification, depending upon organic fitness and susceptibility, it is not a supernatural power or
a special 'gift,' neither does it insure the moral purity nor the intellectual ability of the medium,
any more than musical or artistic capabilities are evidences of the special intelligence or the high
moral tones of their possessors."

Mediumship and Genius.

The spirits controlling the hand of a celebrated writing medium, once delivered through him the
following message regarding the nature and development of mediumistic powers: "Mediumship
is a development of that which is, in another sort, genius. Genius, the opened and attentive ear to
spirit guidance and inspiration, shades away into mediumship, the facile instrument of spirit
manifestation. In proportion as the medium becomes open to influence, directly exercised, is he
valuable as a means whereby direct messages are conveyed. And in proportion as the individual
spirit is lost and merged in the great ocean of spirit, is the result most direct and serviceable. It is
when the passive spirit is content to allow us to use the corporeal instrument, as it does when
itself operates, that we gain satisfactory results. That can only be when a condition of perfect
passivity, as far removed from scepticism as from credulity, has been secured. This opening of
the spiritual being to spiritual influences is what you call mediumship. The true and valuable
gifts are purely spiritual and must be used for spiritual purposes; not for gain, or for satisfying
curiosity, or for base or unworthy ends."
 Spontaneous Mediumship.

178

What may be called "spontaneous mediumship" is experienced by many persons not claiming
mediumistic powers, and not understanding the nature of the phenomena manifesting to and
through themselves. Such persons at times are conscious of the presence of spirit friends, and
may even catch glimpses of them either in the form of a mental image impressed upon their
minds by the spirit friends, or else by a more or less clear partial materialization. Sometimes raps
manifest themselves in their vicinity, and tables and light articles of furniture may manifest
movement at their touch or approach. Such persons, not understanding the laws of spirit
manifestation, are frequently greatly distressed, or even frightened, by such manifestations; and
in not a few cases they experience considerable annoyance and grief by reason of the attitude of
their friends who are apt to consider them "queer," or "spooky," and therefore to be avoided.
Moreover, in the case of the physical manifestations such as the movements of tables, furniture,
etc., and the production of raps, these persons are frequently accused of deliberate fraud in the
production of such phenomena, whereas as a matter of fact they, themselves, are quite in the dark
as to the cause and nature of the phenomena in question. It is obvious that the placing of the right
information in the hands of such persons, and their instruction in the laws and principles of
mediumship would be a blessing to them.

Mediumistic Flashes.

A writer has the following to say concerning this class of mediumistic persons: "Those persons
who 179 are naturally sensitive sometimes experience strange and sudden impulses. Thoughts
come to them 'in a flash,' so to speak. They say things spontaneously which they had not
intended to say—the words seem to burst from them and 'say themselves.' Others have equally
sudden and fugitive clairvoyant experiences; they see spirits where they least expect, and when
they are absorbed in something else; but when they strongly desire to 'see' or to receive guidance,
they get nothing. This state of affairs, in all probability, is due to the fact that their susceptibility
is not sufficiently developed; their psychical impressibility can only be reached and acted upon
under specially favorable conditions, which are disturbed and dissipated when the ordinary
intellectual self is aroused.

Systematic Development.

"The remedy will be found in the systematic cultivation of interior repose and confidence. The
psychic must learn to regard it as a perfectly natural experience that the spiritual states and
positive thoughts of excarnate people should impinge upon his spiritual sphere, and while
'attentive to the holy vision,' should calmly accept the fact and maintain the attitude or response;
not anxiously nor demandingly, but thankfully enjoying the spiritual communion and
illumination thus afforded to him. It is only natural that many people should desire to become
mediums, and that they should wish to ascertain what constitutes mediumship, and what is
required to secure its development. But those who express these desires should remember that in
all probabilities months, if not years, of patient development have been necessary for the success
and 180 efficiency of those celebrated mediums whom they admire and probably envy." But, as
we have said before, if the "call" to mediumship be felt, then it may be heeded; though the
person must be prepared to pay the price of toil and work, patience and perseverance, required to
attain the mountain top of mediumship.

The Development Circle.

As we have repeatedly stated in the foregoing pages, the actual spirit circle is the best possible
means of developing the latent powers of mediumship, and the simplest, readiest, and most
effective method of discovering the presence of such latent powers in the individual. As a
leading medium has told us, it is "the primary school for the study of spiritual facts, and for the
training of mediums." The "spirit circle," as most of you know, is a company of harmonious,
earnest, sympathetic persons joining their psychic powers for the purpose of aiding the medium
to establish the lines of psychic communication between the earth plane and the planes of the
spiritual world. It must here be stated that by "development" we do not mean the cultivation of
the powers of the spirits, but rather the training and unfoldment of the powers of the medium to
receive and transmit the power exercised by the spirit controls.

The Aspirational Attitude.

To those who purpose to develop their latent mediumistic powers by and through the
development circle, we would say that it is of the highest importance that they should cultivate a
trustful, hopeful mental attitude, and a willingness to open themselves 181 to the inflow of the
spiritual power of their friends of the spiritual planes. As a writer has said, they should "make
some mental preparation, such as eliminating from their minds all disturbing or irritating
thoughts, and by striving to consciously realize union of purpose with those who may have
previously made their presence known or indicated their intention to help in the work of the
development of their mediumistic powers, by mentally requesting that the spiritual ties may be
strengthened. Even where there has not been any clear indication of the presence of spirit
helpers, a generally aspirational and receptive attitude of mind will do much towards providing
favorable conditions."

Natural Unfoldment.

Again, the person wishing to develop his latent mediumistic powers must exercise patience and
perseverance, and must not insist upon a premature attempt at revelation on the part of the spirits.
The process of the unfoldment of the mediumistic powers should be akin to that of the
unfoldment of the bud of the flower, that is to say, it must be gradual, natural, and unforced. The
writer above mentioned, says on this point: "Too many people, instead of waiting until the spirits
were ready to communicate with them, have pressed for 'tests' before the connections were
properly made. They have complicated matters by their eager questionings, and have worried the
operators until everything went wrong; and then, because the answers were incorrect,
inconsequent and misleading, or persistently negative, they declared that the spirit was a
deceiver, evil, or foolish, and, while having only themselves to blame, gave up the sittings in
disgust, whereas, had they 182 been less impetuous, less opinionated, less prejudiced, they would
in all probability have eventually obtained satisfactory proofs of the presence of their spirit loved
ones."
 Persistent Watchful Waiting.

Some persons are so disappointed because they have not obtained results after two or three
sittings that they give up further efforts. It would perhaps amaze such persons to know that many
of the world's most celebrated mediums have, in the beginning of their development circle work,
sat for several weeks, or even several months, at frequent intervals, without obtaining more than
the most meagre results; but they afterwards developed the most marvelous power. An extreme
case is cited in the history of spiritualism, in which a couple sat night after night for six months,
without missing a sitting and without being rewarded by a single physical result; but after this
tedious and discouraging wait, all at once, as it were, the spirits secured the most perfect kind of
communication through them, and difficult table tippings and levitation, convincing raps,
messages, writings, and finally materializations follows, until their fame spread all over the
world of spiritualism.

Building Lines of Communication.

Just how long it will require to obtain convincing results at the development circle is a matter
largely dependent upon certain conditions. Much, of course, depends upon the faculty of the
medium to adjust and harmonize himself with the spirits, so as to furnish a "clear wire" for them
to operate over. Again, much depends upon the character of the 183 persons constituting the
circle. A circle composed of harmonious, helpful persons will do much to hasten the coming of
the manifestation, whereas one composed of inharmonious, sceptical, impatient, and materialistic
persons will do much to retard the progress and development of the mediumistic powers.

Developing Concentration.

The following advice on this particular subject will be found helpful to those contemplating the
formation of development circles, and the unfoldment of their latent powers of mediumship; it is
from the pen of an earnest student of this subject, and one who is himself a competent medium.
This person says: "One of the most important prerequisites for success in the development of
mediumship along spiritual lines is the cultivation of the power of concentration. In the early
days of the movement the would-be medium was advised to be 'passive,' and passivity was often
construed into self-effacement. We are now learning to distinguish between receptivity and
docility, between apathy and aspiration. A medium is not, and should not be willing to become a
mere irresponsible tool. For intelligent and beneficial association with, and inspiration from, the
people of the higher life, a certain degree of abstraction is necessary. To cut one's self off from
ordinary conditions, to retire into the sanctuary of one's own inner consciousness, to 'enter the
silence' as it is sometimes called, is helpful training for the preparation of conditions favorable
for the manifestation of spirit-power. The Quakers were true spiritualists in this sense, and
evidently realized the need for the concentration of the soul's 184 forces and their withdrawal
from the outer plane, preparatory to the descent of the spiritual influence that moved them to
speak.

The Call for Illumination.

"The sincere supplication for illumination and guidance is never in vain. The spirit breathes a
serener air, and is calmed, strengthened, and comforted by the subsequent reaction. It is
harmonized thereby, and thus becomes accordant to the psychic forces which, like the ocean's
tides, ebb and flow throughout the universe, and bathe every soul that lies open to their vivifying
and quickening influence. Still more, there are those who dwell in the Light, whose thoughts and
love go out to all such as truly call upon God; and these, the ministering messenger spirits, often
pour their libations of sympathy into the sad hearts of the sorrowful ones on earth, even though
they remain unknown and their interposition is unrecognized by those to whom they have given
their loving and helpful thoughts.

The Jacob's Ladder of Communion.

"By the earnest study of the conditions requisite for the development of body, mind, and psychic
sense, the intelligent medium will endeavor to meet the friends who inspire him at least half way
on the Jacob's ladder of communion, and to enter into reciprocal and conscious fellowship with
them on the thought plane, so that their inspirations may freely flow through his instrumentality
to others, unobstructed by his personality. Classes for the development of mediumship along
these lines are very much needed; classes in which the members are 185 expected to take an
active part, not merely to sit and sit, and let the spirits do all the work, but by systematic
preparation and spiritual aspiration and cultivated receptivity prepare themselves to become lucid
and capable instruments for the transmission of information and helpful influences from the
other side.

The Attainment of Excellence.

"There is but one course of procedure for the successful attainment of excellence in any field of
labor or thought, and that is by study and training, by observation, by persevering application and
determined effort, by readiness to learn, and responsiveness to every influence which will help to
smooth the pathway to the desired success. The intelligent medium who follows this course will
not go blindly on groping in the obscurity of the psychic realm, and becoming the tool for unseen
and unknown agents, but he will unfold his powers, and by co-operating with them will learn to
know and trust his preceptors, until he may possibly become as a spirit among spirits, the
conscious possessor of such knowledge regarding his own spiritual nature and powers that he
will be a ready instrument in the hands of enlightened spirit people, with whom he can
knowingly work for human good."

What a Development Circle Is.

Now then, with the above advice and admonitions in mind, the persons who desire to develop
and unfold their mediumistic powers will do well to take the necessary steps to form a
development circle. The "circle" it must be remembered, is not merely a crowd of persons
gathered together for the purpose 186 of witnessing spiritualistic manifestations or phenomena.
Instead, it is a gathering of persons who desire to co-operate in establishing relations with the
world of spirits, and to receive communications therefrom. In the case of the development circle,
the purpose is to demonstrate that well established spiritualistic principle that the mediumistic
faculty in all of its forms is best developed and unfolded, cultivated and strengthened, by an
actual sitting in the circle, in such a way as to perfect and spiritualize the magnetism of the sitters
by their mutual action on each other, and by the influence and power of the spirits employing
such magnetic and psychic forces so furnished them by the circle of harmonious sitters. Or, as a
writer has well expressed it: "The purpose for which a spirit circle is held is that by the blending
of the aura, psychic force, or magnetic emanations of the sitters, the attention of disembodied
spirits may be attracted and a battery be formed by means of which they can communicate with
the circle. The focalization of this force rests with the unseen operator, and if they are skilled in
the 'modus operana,' they know where, how, and in what way to use it to the best advantage."

Forming the Development Circle.

The circle should be composed of not less than four persons, and not more than twelve. It is well
to have an equal number of persons of each sex, if this be possible; if not possible to obtain an
equality of the sexes, the effort should be made to come as near to that equality as is possible.
The members of the circle should seat themselves around 187 a table, and as nearly as is possible
the sexes should be alternated in this grouping, that is to say, a man should sit next to a woman,
and so on. It will be found well to have the same persons regularly attend the circles, so far as is
possible. Likewise, it will be found advantageous to always use the same table, and to hold the
circle in the same room—but these things are not absolutely essential, and very good results may
often be obtained by having the members of the circle gather at the different homes of its
respective members. While cheerfulness is well on the part of the sitters, there should be no
indulgence in levity and joking during the sitting. The room should be comfortably warmed and
lighted in the ordinary way.

The Sitters in the Circle.

The sitters will do well to occupy their same places at each sitting, unless the spirits indicate
otherwise. The medium, or in the absence of a recognized medium the most sensitive person in
the circle, should sit in the circle at a place mentally recognized as the "head of the table," even
though the table be circular in form. It will be well for the sitters to hold each others' hands at the
beginning of the circle, in order to generate the necessary magnetism. But after the circle is
actually formed, the sitters should place their hands on the top of the table, close to its edge; the
small fingers of the hands of each sitter touching those of the sitter on either side of him—in this
way there is a psychic and magnetic battery formed of the sitters, providing perfect connection is
maintained.

The Spirit Communication Code.

188

At the beginning, the leader should plainly announce the signalling conditions, so as to avoid
confusion on the part of the sitters and the visiting spirits (for there are several codes in use, and
confusion sometimes occurs). The most general used and approved code is as follows: "Three
indicates Yes; One indicates No; Two indicates 'doubtful'; Four indicates 'don't know'; and Five
indicates 'call the alphabet.'" The numbers refer to the number of raps or table-tilts, etc., given by
the spirits in answer to questions asked them. When the alphabet is called for, some one of the
circle slowly calls out each letter of the alphabet, in regular order, until a rap or table-tilt indicate
that the right letter has been indicated; this letter should then be written down, and the alphabet
again called, until the next letter is indicated; and so on until the message is completed. For
instance, the name "John" would be spelt out as J-O-H-N, four callings of the alphabet being
necessary to obtain the same.

The Matter of Time Conditions.

The time at which the seances are held is not in itself important, but it will be found best to fix
such time at such an hour that will be most convenient for the sitters, and at which their minds
will not be distracted by thoughts that they should return home, or should be attending to certain
household or business duties, etc. The seances should be held not oftener than, say, twice a week,
or at the most three times a week. Each seance should be continued for about an hour or a little
over—certainly not over two hours at a time. The sitters 189 should be punctual in attendance, so
that no time may be lost or wasted. The idea should be that the spirit friends are awaiting your
coming to fulfill your engagement with them, and one should be as careful to keep such an
engagement as he would were the engagement with his most valued friend or esteemed
acquaintance. Regularity in attendance is also important, as it is important that so far as possible
the same general conditions be maintained at each and every seance. The seance should be
started at the same hour on each occasion, at least so far as is possible, so as to preserve the same
time rhythm.

Opening of the Seance.

It will be well to open the seance with a few moments of earnest, silent meditation—a few
moments of dwelling "in the silence," as some have well called it; and these moments should be
observed in a religious and devotional state of mind, all frivolity and flippancy being carefully
avoided. If some present feel moved to prayer, then by all means let the prayer be made, for there
can scarcely be a more fitting occasion for reverent prayer than a properly conducted seance. A
few moments of hymn-singing may also be found advantageous in the direction of producing the
devotional state of mind on the part of the sitters. The sitters should preserve a solemn frame of
mind and reverent general demeanor during the seance—perhaps the best model is that of an old
time Quaker Meeting in which the silent devout spiritual feeling was so plainly manifest that it
could almost be felt physically. Patience is necessary in conducting a seance, and perseverance is
essential. The manifestations cannot be unduly forced, 190 and there is often required a great deal
of psychical adjustment before the lines of the spiritual communication between the two great
planes of life are fully established.

Developing a Medium.

If the circle be one devoted chiefly to the development of mediumistic powers in some one of its
members, then it will perhaps be best to have only that particular medium present. The remainder
of the sitters should be highly sympathetic toward the developing medium, and should assume
the mental attitude of help and aid toward him. While the early results of such a circle may not
be so interesting as those at which a fully developed medium is present, nevertheless the gradual
unfoldment of the powers of the medium will be found highly interesting, and the gradual
evolution of the character of the phenomena produced will be a liberal education in itself. In case
that in the circle there are no particular persons regarded as being mediums, and where there is a
general desire to develop mediumistic powers among many or all of the sitters, there must be
carefully avoided anything approaching a rivalry between the members of the circle; and at the
same time a strong desire and perfect willingness for the spirit power to manifest through
whomsoever it may prefer, without regard to the personal ambitions of the individual sitters.
Most certainly there must be no spirit of "competition" among the sitters in the circle.

The Personnel of the Circle.

The personal composition of the spiritualistic circle is a very important matter, and those
entering 191 into circle work should pay careful attention to the personal and psychical character
of those composing the circle; and it may be added here that such work requires very nice
powers of discrimination, and a great degree of tact, in order to preserve the proper character of
the circle, and at the same time to avoid wounding the pride of those who are to be rejected.
Regarding the character of those composing the circle, the following statement of a practical
medium will be found of importance. "There are some people who are so sensitive that they
should not sit in circles, because they are liable to become charged with the psychic emanations
from, and dominated by the expectancy of, the sitters, but who are not influenced by spirit power
to any great extent. Or probably there may exist 'cross magnetism,' that is to say the
inharmonious magnetism of different members who are antagonistic to each other. Some sitters
may be sarcastic, merely curious, or selfish, or mercenary, or not over clean, sober or scrupulous,
and all such surroundings act and react upon the highly sensitive organization of the undeveloped
medium, and, above all, provide conditions favorable for the manifestations of mischievous or
malicious spirits, unless the medium is sufficiently developed, or is protected by wise spirits
powerful enough to resist or control such influences. Like attracts like, as a general rule; but
there are exceptions to this, as to most rules, as, for instance, where unfortunate or unhappy
spirits are permitted to manifest, and are even brought to the seance by other and more
experienced spirit people, so that they may be helped. The influence of the sitters in moulding
the conditions is too little realized. If they introduce an atmosphere of suspicion, doubt, distrust,
192 or detraction, they break the continuity of the flow of psychic energy that has to be employed.
By thus severing the current and dissipating the power, they mar the conditions essential to
success; and, as all such disturbances of necessity center upon and injuriously affect the sensitive
medium, they render soul-satisfying and uplifting communion impossible. To all sitters, we
would say, 'You get to a very great extent what you make conditions for, therefore open the
doors of the heavens by love and purity.'"

Changing the Sitters.

Changes in the membership of a circle is sometimes found to be quite beneficial. If a circle meets
night after night with the same membership, but without obtaining any perceptible results, then it
may be well to consider the desirability of adding some new elements to the membership in the
hope of improving the conditions. Sometimes the addition of a new sitter of the right physical
and psychical temperament works a most remarkable improvement, and in many of such cases
noteworthy phenomena are then produced almost from the time of the change. We have seen
circles in which the condition of non-success was changed in a few moments to one of great and
marked success by the introduction of a new element among the sitters.
 Adding a Medium.

Sometimes there may result certain physical phenomena such as table tippings and movements
of furniture, in cases in which there is a sufficient amount of psychic force generated among the
sitters; but in such cases there may be an absolute failure to produce some of the higher forms of
mediumistic phenomena, 193 such as, for instance, clear spirit messages by raps or otherwise, the
failure being caused by the fact that the circle did not include in its membership any person of
sufficiently developed mediumistic powers to be considered a "medium." In such cases the
introduction into the circle of a person possessing fairly developed mediumistic powers of the
higher order may change the condition of affairs at once, and almost immediately the higher
manifestations may present themselves. In such cases the soil is richly fertilized and highly
cultivated, and all that has been lacking is the strong, vigorous seed of true mediumship. In such
cases when a true medium is discovered by means of his or her introduction into the circle (for
such discovery is often made in this way), it may be well for the circle afterwards to devote itself
to the development of that particular medium. And it must not be forgotten that such
development of the particular medium frequently also results in the development of the other
members sitting in the circle.

Reasons for Changes.

In cases in which the spirits suggest changes in the order of sitting of the members of the circle,
or suggest other changes in the personnel of the circle, such suggestions should be heeded, and
those who are asked to withdraw from the table should not feel hurt or offended, for there is
usually nothing personal in the matter, and no personal reflection intended by the spirits; the
whole matter is one connected with psychical or magnetic requirements, and all should so accept
it. A writer on this subject has well said: "If you are requested, either by the controlling
intelligence or by the manager of the 194 circle, to take another place, or even if your room is
desired for some unknown cause, do not get angry and create a disturbance, but get with those
with whom you are in spiritual harmony and try it again. All who have succeeded have passed
through great trials and failures, and when success is gained, think of what you have gained. A
knowledge of immortality, possibly, or you have assisted in producing an instrument through
which proofs of immortality may be given."

Psychic Attunement.

One of the most common faults of the sitters at a circle is to become unduly impatient, and to try
to force matters to a clear manifestation of phenomena almost from the moment of the start. This
is all wrong, and is frequently the cause of many failures to obtain the higher phases of
mediumistic phenomena. Sitters should remember this important point, i.e., that the first requisite
of the circle should be to secure perfect and free communication and flow of spiritual power—
after this the more elaborate phases of phenomena may be obtained with comparative ease. One
should hold in mind the illustration of a great wireless telegraph system, in which the sending
and receiving instruments have not as yet been placed in perfect attunement. In such a case it is
of course necessary for the two respective sets of instruments to be adjusted so that they may be
in perfect attunement with each other; and until this is accomplished, there can be messages sent
or received properly—certainly none received in this way. If this idea be held in mind, their
circle will probably secure the psychic attunement in a much shorter time than otherwise.

Pre-Test Manifestations.

195

Do not be in too much of a hurry to obtain "test" messages. Let the communications flow on in a
somewhat rambling manner at first, until the lines of communication are fully and firmly
established, and then you may begin to think about asking test questions of the spirits in order to
establish their identity. A writer says on this point: "Should table movements occur, or raps be
heard, let them go on for a little. Do not ask test questions just yet. Request repetitions, or ask for
them to be clearer or louder, so that they may be sharp and decisive. You may also ask for a
certain number of movements or raps. After that, you may proceed to ask questions as to whether
the circle is sitting in the best arrangement for success. If changes are desired, these should be
made as suggested. It may happen that one or more of the sitters may be requested to change
places, or to withdraw from the table altogether. In such a case the sitter should not take umbrage
for it merely means that their psychical conditions do not blend with those of the rest of the
circle."

Premature Tests.

Regarding the matter of premature tests, or unreasonable demands, the same writer further says:
"Remember that the first requisite is to establish the channel of communication; and all personal
questions as to who and what the spirit is should be reserved until the initial difficulties are
overcome. It is at first most probable that the spirit operators will not be fully aware just what
effect they are producing, and the mind of the medium may not as yet 196 be sufficiently passive,
in fact it may be in a sort of state of protest against being acted upon in this particular way;
accordingly, it is extremely unwise to attempt to obtain responses to test questions or to secure
evidences of the identity of the spirit under these imperfect conditions. Many mediums and
inquirers have been deterred from further development or investigation because such questions
have been prematurely put and the answers pressed for, with the result that confusing and
contradictory responses were given, and the conclusion was hastily drawn that it was all fraud,
delusion, of the devil."

Forcing Tests.

Another writer has said on this point: "I then, in my anxiety, made a mistake which anxious
inquirers sometimes make. I wanted more—I pressed for another test, forgetting the difficulties
of mediumship, and the supreme effort which must have been made to give me what I had
obtained. And this resulted in failure after remarkable tests had been given." Another writer,
commenting upon the last quoted statement, says: "This is exactly how mediums are used; they
give test after test, not to satisfy, but only to produce the desire for more. Then when the power is
weakened, comes the inability—or 'fraud,' as the imperfection in mediumship is often called.
This will be the case until they can have the only condition which is suitable for spiritual
communion—passive trust and confidence. Real tests cannot come when sought with
materialistic conditions. The tests come unsought, unasked for."
 Spirit Directions.

Another point which should be borne in mind by the sitters in the circle is that the spirits should
be 197 consulted as to just what they wish to manifest at the seance. They should be asked to state
plainly just what order of phenomena they desire to manifest and demonstrate, and just what they
wish the circle to do in order to create the best conditions for the manifestation. And it will be
found advisable to heed the wishes and instructions of the spirits in such cases, and to conform as
far as possible with the same. In this way the intelligent co-operation of spirits and the circle may
be obtained, and the most desirable results be obtained. However, there is a limit to this
acceptance and course, and in no case should the limits of reasonableness be exceeded in the
matter. As a writer has well said: "It may happen that the conditions asked for by the
communicating intelligence may seem to be ludicrous or impracticable; and in such case
representations to that effect should be made to the spirit, and if such instructions are persisted
in, except where, through long association, confidence is felt in the spirit, or very clear evidence
of knowledge has been manifested, the medium and sitters, exercising their own reasoning
powers, should quietly and firmly decline to do what is asked of them, and some other course
should be suggested. We do not advise either medium or sitters to blindly accept or follow what
is given to or through them. Reason should ever reign, but even reason will show that in
experimental work it is sometimes advisable to tentatively adopt and follow some course that
may not, at first sight, appear quite reasonable."

Questioning the Spirits.

After a satisfactory arrangement of the sitters is obtained, and the table tiltings or rappings have
198 assumed a clear, definite character, then the sitters may proceed to ascertain the identity of
the spirit seeking to communicate to the circle; or else to ascertain whether the spirit wishes to
deliver a message directed specially to some particular one of the sitters. In the latter case, the
person indicated should prepare to question the spirit direct, either verbally or else silently and
mentally. In either case the question should be stated clearly and to the point, so that the spirit
may give a simple definite answer. Questions which may be answered by a simple "Yes" or "No"
are of course preferable. If the spirit agrees to move the table, or else produce raps, as the
alphabet is called over letter by letter, the communication and answers may of course be given in
much fuller detail. In such case the spirit may be called on to spell out its name, and to designate
its relationship to any of the sitters; or even to spell out a complete message. In addressing the
spirit one should pursue the same general course employed in addressing questions to a friend in
the flesh; and care should be taken to address the spirit politely and in a kindly tone. Some spirits
are very sensitive concerning these details, and will resent any impoliteness or discourtesy, or
flippancy from strangers.

Substance and Shadow.

Moreover, the earnest investigator of spiritualistic phenomena must always bear in mind that the
mere production of mediumistic phenomena of the physical phase is not the real object of the
investigation and sittings. These things, interesting as they may be in themselves, should be
regarded as merely the incidents of the intelligent communication and reception 199 of messages
from the inhabitants of the higher planes of life and existence. The spiritualistic circle should be
more than a mere "wonder shop" in which are exhibited strange and unusual physical
phenomena; rather should it be regarded as the receiving end of the wireless system over which
we may and do receive valuable communications from those who have passed on before us.
As a writer has said: "It is not so much that the table moves with or without contact, or that
strange rappings are heard, that is of paramount importance, but that by these means of
communication actual and intelligent communication can be obtained and maintained with so-
called dead people; and evidences of spirit identity, as well as loving and cheering messages may
be obtained in that way from loved ones who were supposed to be gone forever. This is the
important point to be established beyond all peradventure."

200

PART IX
MEDIUMISTIC PHENOMENA

Some students of this book who have noted in the foregoing pages certain references to the
conduct of the sitters in the circle may ask themselves the question: "Why are the sitters so
important, when the power is really exerted by the spirits through the medium?" In fact, such
questions, often uttered in the spirit of adverse criticism, are frequently propounded by sceptics
to spiritualists, and it is well that the answer should be correctly given. As a matter of fact the
understanding of such answer will mean the possession of some important facts concerning the
phenomena of mediumship, and without which the investigator will possibly wander far astray
from the main road of truth concerning such phenomena.

The Part Played by the Sitters.

All of the best authorities on the subject of spiritualism are practically agreed concerning the
important part played by the sitters in the circle in all manifestations of spirit power. As J. J.
Morse 201 says: "There are three factors concerned in mediumship: (1) the spirit controlling; (2)
the mental atmosphere of the medium controlled; and (3) the mental atmosphere of the people
surrounding the medium." And as A. Morton has said: "The requirements for honesty on the part
of mediums are equally binding upon investigators; they must have honesty of purpose if they
expect to attract honest spirits."

Result of Bad Sitters.

And Wallis has said: "Although the spirits may be intensely anxious to demonstrate their power,
they are sometimes repelled from those whom they seek to approach by the bristling and
discordant conditions of mind that prevail among the sitters, who disperse with a feeling of
dissatisfaction and disappointment. If the sitters only knew it, the so-called failure was directly
traceable to the destructive thought-atmosphere with which they surround themselves and the
medium. Too frequently they do not prepare themselves for 'the hour's communion with the
dead,' and their mental attitude is anything but conductive to success. They do not put away the
thronging thoughts, anxieties, and worries of their busy lives, but carry them right into the seance
chamber, yet expect good spiritual results. Both sitter and medium may very easily destroy the
indispensable conditions of spirit-manifestation, and the medium's honesty, not his want of
growth, or of knowledge, is called in question by the investigator who knows, and perhaps cares,
nothing for the occult laws he has violated, not obeyed."

Mental Atmosphere of the Medium.

202

Likewise, it must not be forgotten that an important factor in the production of mediumistic
phenomena is that which Morse, in the above quotation, has called "the mental atmosphere of the
medium controlled." In many cases the spirit powers are present and ready to manifest freely,
and the mental atmosphere of the sitters is likewise desirable and sympathetic, but still the
manifestations are but faint, irregular, and generally unsatisfying—the weak link of the chain
being found in the mental state of the medium, and consequently in the mental atmosphere
arising from the same. Such undesirable mental states and atmospheres may be said to arise
principally from two general causes, as follows: (1) Desire on the part of the medium to produce
sensational or brilliant results, and (2) Doubt on the part of the medium concerning the
genuineness and validity of the communications. Let us consider each of these in further detail.

The Mediumistic Mind.

If the medium is filled with the idea or notion of producing brilliant or sensational results, he will
in all probability so disturb the placidity of the receiving surface of his mind that the latter will
fail to register or record the impressions being made upon it by the spirit vibrations. It is similar
to the case of a placid bosom of a deep lake which, normally, will reflect clearly and distinctly
the images of the surrounding scenery cast upon it from the light waves; but which, if disturbed
by strong breezes, will exhibit merely a distorted, disturbed, incomplete, and untrue reflection of
the surrounding 203 scenery cast upon its surface. A strong desire of the kind mentioned will tend
to agitate and disturb the normal placid condition of the mental reflecting surface of the
mediumistic mind.

Mediumistic "Stage Fright."

In the same way the placid reflecting surface of the mediumistic mind may become disturbed by
the presence of fear, doubt, and distrust in the mind of the medium. It may at first seem strange
that the medium should doubt the manifestations being made through his mentality, provided that
he be honest and genuine. But the answer and explanation is very simple. The medium
(particularly the young medium) may become panic-stricken by the thought that "perhaps this is
merely the result of my own imagination or fancy, instead of spirit power," and the result will be
that he will begin to halt and stumble, stammer and stutter, instead of allowing the message to
flow through him uninterrupted. This is particularly true when the message is of the nature of a
test of identity, and where the vocal organs of the medium are being employed in the
manifestation. It occurs far more frequently than the public suppose, that the medium is stricken
by stage-fright or the panic of fear, arising from the causes above given, i.e. the sudden fear that
he is allowing his fanciful imagination to run away with him instead of his being under genuine
control.

The Psychic Telephone System.

The medium should ever strive to guard against this harmful mental state, and should open
himself completely to the spirit influence, casting aside all 204 fear and doubt, and placing all
responsibility upon the controlling spirit or band of helpers. The medium should remember that
he is merely the "medium" or psychic telephone system, and is not an active party to the process
of spirit communication. He should, therefore, never either unduly strive to please, nor be fearful
or distrustful concerning the validity of the manifestation being made through him. Let the spirits
attend to their end of the line, and the sitters to the other end—the medium is on neither end of
the line, but is the line itself.

Interrupted Communications.

It should not be forgotten, in this connection, that the spirits have their own difficulties to
contend with. In the current slang phrase, they "have troubles of their own" to overcome in the
production of mediumistic phenomena. Not only does the spirit wishing to communicate have to
draw sufficient psychic power from the medium and the sitters, not only has he to scientifically
adjust the apparatus at the sending end of the psychic telephonic line, but he has also to be sure
that he is actually communicating the message so that it may be received by the sitters. In such
cases the spirit is placed in a position similar to that of a person at one end of a telephone line,
who after had an answer to his opening "Hello!" talks away, thinking that the person at the other
end is hearing every word he utters, perfectly unconscious that the communication has been
interrupted from some cause or other common to telephone lines. How often do we, in our
telephone conversations, interrupt our flow of talk to anxiously inquire, "Are you still there?" or
"Do you hear me?"

Some Difficulties of the Spirits.

205

A writer on the subject has well said regarding this difficulty on the part of the communicating
spirit: "Spirits have many difficulties to overcome." On one occasion, a medium felt the
influence of an arisen friend very strongly. It was accompanied by an intense desire to speak, and
yet the medium was unable to give utterance to that which the spirit wished to have said. In
answer to an inquiry that was subsequently made as to why the spirit had been unable to
communicate with his dear ones, one of the familiar controls of the medium explained that he
thought that he had actually spoken. His feeling of nearness to them was so vivid, and his wish to
express himself through the lips of the medium had been so intense, that it was only after he had
ceased his efforts to control that he realized that he had only thought and intended, but had not
succeeded in compelling the sensitive to utter his message. This will perhaps explain why
mediums sometimes rise to their feet and act as if they were about to speak, but get no further—
they do not receive the impression, or the right mental impulse; they feel as if they could speak
and yet they have nothing to say. At such times a few words of sympathy and inquiry from the
conductor of the circle may assist the control to realize the situation and succeed in his endeavors
to communicate.

Difficulties Overcome.

"Even on this side, when we send telegraphic messages or use the telephone, mistakes and
misunderstandings are by no means uncommon occurrences, 206 and our letters sometimes create
an impression in the mind of the reader which we did not intend to convey. Is it any wonder,
then, that messages from the other side are imperfectly impressed upon, and incorrectly rendered
by, the medium? Most persons who have attempted to transfer thoughts to mesmerized sensitives
have realized that general ideas can be transmitted much more easily than names, dates, or
specific words can be impressed upon or expressed by the subject. The wonder is, not that so few
names, ages, and special details are given by spirits to and through mediums, but that,
considering all the attendant circumstances, so many 'test' messages are continually being given,
both privately and in public."

The Psychic Triangle.

In considering the question of the requisites of the mediumistic circle, the student should
remember always that there is a psychic triangle in all such circles, viz., a triangle of which the
spirit constitutes one side, the medium a second side, and the sitters a third side. And it is
essential that a harmony and sympathy between all three sides of the triangle should be preserved
and maintained. Therefore, sitters at the circle should endeavor to do their part in producing and
maintaining such harmony with both the medium, the spirits, and finally with each other—and
this last is not the least, by any means. Unless there be at least a very fair degree of harmony
between the several members constituting the circle, there will be something important lacking in
their harmony of the circle as a whole toward the other two sides of the psychical triangle.

Harmonious Relationship.

207

The sitters composing the circle should always remember that mutual harmony is a most
important factor contributing to the success of the manifestations sought to be secured.
Accordingly, each sitter should strive to bring himself or herself into a sympathetic and
harmonious relationship with each and every other sitter, so far as is possible. To accomplish this
result the sitters should endeavor, so far as is possible, to lay aside their respective prejudices,
jealousies, and differences of opinion. These incidents of their personality should be left,
together with their hats and outer wraps, in the outer hall of the house in which the seance is
held. Differences of religion, politics, race and creed, all should be cast aside at least temporarily,
in order that the greatest amount of harmony should be manifested by the group. A safe rule to
follow is this: seek to find the largest number of points of mutual agreement, and to set aside all
the rest of the items of personal tastes, customs and habits of feeling and thought. Dwell together
on the plane of common agreement, shutting out the planes of respective disagreements. In this
connection we should state that the customary attitude of cold reserve, blended and colored by
suspicion, which too often is found between comparative strangers, is far from being helpful in
producing the best conditions for the seance. For the time being, at least, the sitters should try to
remember that they are all members of one great human family, and united by the bonds of
common origin and nature.

The Discordant Note.

208

A writer recites an incident in a circle which he once attended, which so thoroughly illustrates
the point just made, that we think it worth while to reproduce it here. He says: "On one occasion
in particular, we had a remarkable illustration of the detrimental influence of one or two sitters. It
occurred at a seance at which a number of mediums were present, and, under ordinary
circumstances, successful results would have been practically certain; but this was not an
ordinary seance—at least, not in the opinion of one lady who apparently imagined that she had
been invited to discover fraud, and that the rest of us were suspicious characters. Up to the
moment of her appearance in the circle we were a happy family of sociable folk, and enjoyed a
very pleasant season of conversational interchange. When, however, the said lady, accompanied
by a friend, joined the company, there was a silence that could be felt. The social temperature fell
rapidly—people visibly stiffened and became constrained. The two ladies appeared to feel afraid
to speak lest they should say anything that might be used by the mediums, and spoke in
monosyllables. Sitting bolt upright, grim and silent, they drew up to the table, and when the
phenomena began they displayed no signs of interest. Their 'detective' attitude was so
objectionable that even those who had endeavored to thaw out these self-constituted Sherlock
Holmeses, gave up the attempt, and, in consequence, what had promised to be a really enjoyable
evening, proved one of the most uncomfortable it has been our lot to experience."

Antagonistic Elements.

209

Another incident of the kind is related by a writer, as follows: "On one occasion, when some
experiments were being made by a medium, under control, in the direction of psychometry and
clairvoyance, a lady expressed a desire to be the subject for delineation. After one or two efforts
the medium exclaimed, 'I am very sorry, but for some reason I am quite unable to get anything
from you, or for you.' Shortly afterwards the lady in question remarked to one of the sitters, 'I
knew he would not be able to give me anything. That is the third medium that I have knocked
out.' The failure to obtain results under such impossible conditions is a proof of the genuine
psychic nature of the powers of the mediums. If they were pretenders they would succeed in
doing something under any circumstances and in spite of such adverse psychic conditions."
While we are far from holding that the sitters in a circle should lay aside all ordinary caution and
good judgment, and instead to assume the mental attitude of utter and unquestioning credulity
and acceptance, we do positively declare that the mental state of preconceived distrust and
suspicion is often almost fatal to the production and demonstration of the highest manifestations
of spirit phenomena.

The Open Mind.

The proper mental state of the scientific investigator of spiritualistic phenomena is that of "the
open mind." The sitters should endeavor to lay aside all prejudices and preconceived
conceptions, and in place thereof should endeavor to hold a fair, 210 impartial mental attitude—
and this accompanied by a desire to have the manifestations proceed naturally, freely and fully.
The results should be sympathetically awaited and received, and the judgment of careful
reasoning withheld until afterward when the whole proceedings may be recalled and considered
in the light of cold reason. One has but to consider the extremely sensitive psychical condition of
the mentality of the medium, and the nicely balanced mental atmosphere of the circle, to realize
how easily this sensitiveness may be affected, and the nice balance be disturbed, by the
projection of strong mental waves of distrust, suspicion, and antagonism into the atmosphere of
the circle. The attitude of the intelligent scientific investigator should be that of a calm and
observant soul. Such an investigator should have what Sir William Crookes once called "a mind
to let," i.e., a mind from which all prejudices and preconceived theories and notions have been
ejected for the time being, and into which Truth, from any source, should always be welcomed as
a tenant. Instead of seeking to throw obstacles in the way of the medium, one should endeavor to
assist by mental attitude and demeanor, and by observance of the necessary conditions, in the
production of the spirit manifestations and in the demonstration of spirit identity.

Spirits and the Sense of Humor.

It is not necessary for the sitters to assume an attitude of preternatural gravity and solemnity.
Instead, they should be natural and cheerful, though of course not flippant or trifling, or
indulging in an exhibition of the cheap remarks which by so many 211 is mistaken for wit. The
sense of humor, however, need not be thrown aside or discarded, for as all investigators know
many of the spirit visitors have a very highly developed sense of humor, and sometimes even go
so far as to seemingly endeavor to shock some of the melancholy, over-serious, "prunes and
prism" type of sitters. As a writer well says: "Spirits are human still, and a good, breezy laugh, a
hearty, joyous, kindly sympathetic disposition, goes a long way to open the avenues by which
they can approach us." Another has said: "Experience has taught that the spiritual circle should
be presided over by 'a pure heart and a strong head'—to which qualities might well be added a
well-ordered development of the sense of humor, for the absence of humor often tends to make
philosophy grotesquely ill-proportioned."

Rhythmic Harmony.

The manifestation of rhythmic harmony often materially aids in the generation of psychic power,
and the consequent production of advantageous conditions at the circle. Many circles are opened
by having the several sitters indulge in harmonious rhythmic breathing for a few minutes—all
breathing in unison—in order to produce this condition of rhythm. Those who have never
practiced this unison of rhythmic breathing will be surprised at the consciousness of psychical
harmony which may be produced in this way among a number of persons gathered together in a
circle. This principle of rhythm is what is really involved in the call of many spirits for singing
at the beginning of a seance. In singing there is a certain unison and rhythm unconsciously
212 observed, and it is this rather than the air or words of the songs which produces the desire
conditions. A writer states that upon one occasion a manifesting spirit said: "It isn't noise that I
want; it's harmony! If you cannot sing, you can at least count out loud, and count altogether—
that may give us the right vibrations." That spirit had the right idea, and one which it would be
well for all sitters to remember and put into effect. Vibration is the secret of all things, and
rhythm is the measure and spirit of all vibrations; therefore, the very harmony of a circle may be
said to be rhythmic. There is a great truth involved in these statements, and you will do well to
ponder over them.

Retarding Factors.

It should be almost unnecessary to state that haste, hurry and impatience are retarding factors in a
spiritualistic seance; but, alas, too many persons seem to be totally unaware of this important
fact. We call your attention to the following remarks concerning this point, the same having been
made by a writer on the subject who himself is a medium of extended experience. He says:
"Impatience and anxiety are disintegrating mental conditions. People who are all the time
looking at their watches and thinking, 'Oh! I wish they would hurry up.' 'Oh! do be quick, don't
keep us here all night, we shall surely miss our train,' etc., are disturbers of the peace, and break
the conditions which require harmony and repose. 'We have found out that we cannot hurry
them,' said a lady who had enjoyed much experience in circles; and consequently, when you are
sitting for different phenomena, you need 213 to have plenty of time and be prepared to sit good
humoredly for hours, if need be, to see it through; and then results are likely to speedily ensue;
whereas the more you try to hurry, the more anxious you become, the less likelihood is there that
you will secure results at all. You can surely realize that hurry, impatience, anxiety, intense
expectancy, fear and suspicion must of necessity disturb the conditions and prove inimical to the
efforts of the spirit operators to present clear and convincing demonstrations of their power and
identity."

Reasonable Demands of Spirits.

In the above stated instance, and others similar to it, it at first seems as if the spirits were
overparticular, and "finnicky" about the conditions, but a little careful thought will show you that
this is not the real state of affairs at all. The spirits are not "finnicky," but are merely desirous of
securing the conditions necessary to a successful manifestation, and all their efforts are bent
toward that end. This, and this alone, is the cause of their so-called "finnickiness." Surely they
are justified in this—would not any and all of us feel the same way if we were trying to establish
communications with another plane, where such communication largely dependent upon the
production and maintenance of certain conditions? I think so.

Harmonious Conditions.

It is not an easy task to give specific directions for development of mediumistic power for the
guidance of one who is desirous of unfolding such powers 214 after they have first manifested
their presence in him. In fact, as many of the best authorities on the subject agree, it is practically
impossible to lay out a course of cut-and-dried directions of this kind. This arises logically from
the conditions present in such cases, and from the special circumstances surrounding the subject
of mediumship. In fact, it may be broadly stated that at the beginning the medium can do but
little in the direction of such development, other than to present harmonious conditions through
which the spirits may be able to manifest their presence and their power.
 The Channel of Communication.

It must be always remembered that the medium is not the active agent in the production of
mediumistic phenomena—he is not called to do anything except to passively act as the medium
or channel of communication between the two planes of existence. He is always the intermediary
between the two planes, and is not the active agent on either plane. The active agents are the
spirits on the one plane, and the sitters in the circle on the other plane. The sitters must supply
much of the actual operative power from the one plane, and the spirits must do all of the
communication from the other plane. The medium serves to connect the two opposite ends of the
psychic telephone system so that the messages may pass through and over the mediumistic
channel, secure and maintain the best psychic conditions.

The Role of the Spirits.

We have spoken of the part of the work which it is necessary for the sitters to perform in order to
215 And now we shall have something to say concerning the part to be played properly by the
spirits wishing to communicate. It must not be supposed for a moment that every spirit is
possessed of the necessary knowledge enabling it to communicate easily through a medium, or
even to develop the medium so that he may become an efficient channel of communication.
Spirits are frequently found to be sadly deficient in such knowledge and experience, and the
development of the medium as well as the production of satisfactory phenomena, suffer from this
lack. The spirits who seek to use a medium may or may not be fitted for such task. Many spirits
are utterly unable to properly develop a medium; some fail by reason of their lack of knowledge,
and others fail because of their lack of special aptitude for the task.

Differences Among Spirits.

A writer on this subject well says regarding this particular point: "Some spirits may lack both
knowledge and aptitude; others may have the knowledge, but yet fail from want of the power to
control. They may be able to affect one mediumistic person and not another. Likewise, they may
be able to use a sensitive medium for one phase of mediumship, and yet be unable to succeed in
any other direction. A spirit may be in such conditions that he can produce good physical
phenomena; he may, however, try to do so through a sensitive who is fitted only for trance or
clairvoyant mediumship, but who does not possess the quality or psychic force for sensuous
manifestations. A medium who is naturally qualified for physical demonstrations may persist in
216 desiring trance or inspirational mediumship, and be determined to become a speaker or
nothing.

Disturbing Elements.

"Frequently at the outset both spirits and sitters are ignorant of their powers, of the conditions
necessary for success, and the association that exists between them being affectional rather than
intellectual or spiritual, they have to grope their way towards each other. It follows, therefore,
that experiments have to be made on both sides. Sitters and young mediums often spoil the
seances by over-anxiety. There would not be half so much heard of 'evil spirits' (so-called) if
more regard were paid to the necessity of maintaining a calm, patient, and serene frame of mind.
Some people become excited as soon as phenomena commences; mediums not infrequently get
nervous or timid when they feel that they are being affected, and, although they desire to be
controlled, they are afraid to submit to the influences when they are likely to lose consciousness.
All these are disturbing elements, and naturally interfere with the flow of the forces that are to be
utilized, and prevent the success that is desired. A spirit without any very definite purpose,
finding himself in the presence of a mediumistic person, may seek to influence him, and
spasmodic actions may result. Unless the control should soon give evidence of clear thought and
definite purpose, he should be requested, in a kindly and courteous manner, to seek the assistance
of some spirit who understands the methods to be employed, and induce him to exert his power
for the benefit of the medium and the circle."

Impersonation Mediumship.

217

One of the most interesting phases of mediumship, and the one perhaps most sought after by
earnest seekers of the truth concerning those who have passed over to a higher plane of
existence, is that commonly known as "impersonation mediumship," or perhaps "impersonating
test mediumship," in which the vocal organs of the medium are employed by the communicating
spirit in order to speak directly to those in the circle, or to the visiting friend of the decarnate
spirit who comes into the presence of the medium. Many mediums devote their entire time and
attention to this phase of mediumship, and place themselves at the service of those on the earth
plane who wish to converse directly with their spirit friends or relatives who have passed on.
This is by far the most satisfying phase of mediumship to those on the earth plane who are thus
enabled to receive communications, and perhaps even direct answers to specific questions made
to them. The most convincing evidences of the identity of the communicating spirit are also
obtained through this particular form of mediumship. And this affording of comfort to those still
on the earth plane is one of the most satisfying features of mediumship, and one which will do
more than aught else to reconcile the medium to annoyances and to the personal sacrifices so
often made by the medium.

The True Purpose of Mediumship.

A writer has well given to mediums the following inspiring message concerning the nature,
purpose and aims of their work: "The modes of spirit manifestation 218 are many, the phases
wonderfully varied, but, like a golden cord running through them all, there is a distinct purpose
of bringing to those on earth the glad tidings and proof positive of continued conscious personal
experience in the life after death. The process of psychic development is usually slow, and the
medium will be likely to grow disheartened; but by looking back over the ground already
traversed, and by comparing the faint efforts made at the commencement with the later and fuller
indications of spirit power, he should feel encouraged, and proceed with renewed vigor."

Gradual Development.

The best authorities constantly impress upon young mediums the fact that they should develop
their mediumistic powers to a considerable degree before they venture to give public seances or
exhibitions of their power. As Dr. Dean Clarke well says: "Novices in mediumship have no
business to assume obligations they are not fully qualified to fulfil. Let them take the counsel
metaphorically given by Jesus, to 'tarry in Jerusalem till their beards are grown.'" They should by
all means wait until the spirits are strong enough to control and guard them from the meddlesome
interferences of other persons, both those in the flesh and those out of it. Many spirits will
overwork the medium, and the latter not knowing enough to protect himself will often suffer by
reason thereof. On the other hand, young mediums often yield to the importunities of friends and
other sitters, and will try to oblige and satisfy them, even often at the expense of their own
powers and forces.

Public Seances.

219

A writer, himself a successful medium, gives the following good advice to young mediums: "I
strongly advise all mediums to wait and serve out their apprenticeship thoroughly before they
undertake to sit for sceptics or perform public work, either as test, impersonating, speaking,
seeing, or healing mediums; and the best place to secure the necessary experience, training and
unfolding is in the home circle. After a certain stage has been reached, however, the medium
who has been used for impersonations will in all probability begin to display the powers of
clairvoyance and to receive vivid impressions. Then will come, or they will be accompanied by,
the efforts of the spirits to pass beyond the purely personal and limited forms of expression
associated with the affectionate messages and greetings, to the consideration and explanation of
the conditions and experiences of life on the other side. Spirits who can teach and give more
sequential and sustained addresses will in all likelihood assume control, and under such
conditions it will be found necessary to enlarge the circle and introduce fresh sitters. The
clairvoyant, or psychometrist, needs new subjects with whom to experiment, and the speaking
medium requires an audience to listen to his discourses, so that the next step beyond the small
private circle may well be a semi-public one, or an 'after circle' such as is frequently held at the
close of the public Sunday services in many towns, at which mediums who have reached this
stage are afforded the opportunities they need.

Home Circle Development.

220

"Around the family table, where those who are united in affection meet to hold joyous
communion with their spirit friends, where the blended desire ascends to the spiritual plane, and
becomes the potent magnetic attraction, by which those friends can establish harmonious
relations with the sitters—in such a circle and under such conditions even a weak degree of
mediumistic responsiveness to the outpouring from the spirit side will become intensified and
exalted, until rhythmic vibrations are established and thought and emotion will readily pass from
one to another, and all will be attuned. The best method of cultivation is to regard the
mediumistic sensitiveness as a natural and desirable quality, to be evolved by training and
experiments, under the direction of the reason and the conscience. In this manner the tribunal
which decides the conduct of life is ever present, and no matter what influences are brought to
bear on the sensitive he remains steadfast, realizing that the responsibility for use or abuse rests
upon himself."
 Undue Prolongation of Seances.

There is a great temptation to young mediums to allow their enthusiasm, and desire to aid in
demonstrating spiritualistic phenomena, to cause them to prolong their seances far beyond the
limits which prudence and regard for the medium's physical well-being would dictate. There is a
certain stimulation and excitement arising from the manifestation of phenomena through the
medium, and this in itself 221 is helpful rather than hurtful—a tonic rather than a depressant; but
like all other forms of overindulgence, and excessive yielding to this excitement tends to bring
on a reaction and a swing to the opposite emotional extreme, and the medium suffers thereby in
many cases. There comes a time in all seances when the high-water mark of psychic power is
reached, and this is a good time for the medium to bring the seance to a close—in fact,
experienced mediums do precisely this very thing at this particular time. But this point once
passed, there is experienced a peculiar weakening and depressing feeling, this often being
accompanied by a physical weariness and a feeling of chilliness in the extremities, or even a
slight chilly feeling over the whole body. When these feelings are experienced, the medium
should remember that the limit of reason has been passed, and he should bring matters to a close
without further loss of time. Experienced spirits will usually detect the approach of the reaction
time, and will, themselves, bring the seance to a close, independent of any action on the part of
the medium. But when the spirits are not experienced, they fail to notice this, or even may
become careless about such things in their desire to communicate to the circle. In the latter cases,
the medium must take care of himself.

Good Advice to Young Mediums.

A mediumistic writer gives the following advice on this subject to young mediums: "Never
forget that your nerve-vital energy is used and expended in the exercise of your mediumship, and
that the supply is limited, hence the necessity for care and 222 moderation. Too frequent,
prolonged, or discordant seances; inharmonious conditions and sittings, when you are already
jaded and exhausted, are therefore to be avoided. If you make excessive demands upon your
energies, nervous prostrations and derangements are an almost inevitable consequence. It is not
the use of mediumship, but its abuse that is dangerous—perversion and excess are as injurious in
this direction as they are in others, whereas temperate and healthful exercises are strengthening
and exhilarating. If you feel 'run down,' decline to act. If you feel that the circle is inharmonious,
or that the sitters are depleted and exacting, refuse to sit. If you feel that you are tired, and feel
weary and debilitated on the day following your seances, you may be sure that you are sitting too
long, or that you require the help of a larger circle of congenial friends to supply the requisite
psychic force for your further development."

Self-Protection for Mediums.

Another writer says on this subject: "Mediumship occasionally acts in such a manner that it
becomes a stimulant to every organ and function of the system, and the individual becomes
excited, nervous, and irritable; hence, the greater the acceleration of physiological functions as
the result of psychical influences upon the human body, the more need of caution and restraint in
every department of physiological life." But it must not be understood that the proper practice of
mediumship is harmful and not conducive to good health. On the contrary, as a writer has said:
"We consider the highest degree of 223 physical health perfectly compatible with the best
manifestation of mediumship." Another writer has well said: "If you are not robust enough, if
you have not sufficient knowledge and self-mastery to use your will and maintain control over
your psychic self; if you are unable to guard against the adverse emanations or the drawing
power of others, you had better take lessons in concentration and psychic self-protection; and
until you understand the art of self-possession, refrain from attempting to cultivate your
sensitiveness. It will never do for you to be 'too sensitive'—be natural, sensible, and strong."

Danger in Indiscriminate Magnetizing.

Another point against which the medium should guard himself, is that of allowing others,
indiscriminately, to "magnetize" him to "aid his development" or to "increase his power."
Mediums, particularly while in the psychic condition, are very sensitive and susceptible to
outside mental influences. And for this reason they should be particularly on guard against
allowing themselves to be "magnetized" or influenced psychically by persons of whom they
know nothing. Otherwise, the medium not only places himself under subjection to the mentality
and emotionality of strangers and undesirable persons, just as would a hypnotic subject if he
placed himself under the control of such persons. Moreover, in the case of the medium, there is a
danger of his being so influenced in this way that thereafter he may attract to himself a class of
undesirable spirit influences who would otherwise never have come into his psychic aura or
world. We call attention to 224 the following advice on this point given by an experienced
mediumistic writer:

Detrimental Magnetic Influence.

"No sensible person should surrender himself to the magnetic influence of a human being of
whom he knew nothing; he should need to know and have confidence in him before doing so; yet
we find many who, impelled by a desire to be a medium, without understanding how much the
word implies, sit down and invite any magnetizer who comes along to experiment upon him.
Under such circumstances, nothing but a high motive and a pure purpose will protect them from
the operations of unwise or mischievous intelligences. As well might they go and sit in a public
place with their eyes blindfolded, and with an inscription on their breasts, 'Who will come and
magnetize me?' * * Mesmeric influence from an experienced operator, for the purpose of
inducing susceptibility, is sometimes helpful to a sensitive. If the mesmerist can put you in the
trance condition and then hand you over to trustworthy spirits to control you, well and good. In
the same way, mesmeric passes may be helpful in the liberation of your clairvoyant powers. The
operator may succeed in throwing you into the deep trance state, in which you may travel or
become clairvoyant, but we would not recommend you to submit to mesmeric influence or
hypnotic suggestions from anyone, unless you know that he is experienced and a thoroughly
honorable and trustworthy individual. In circles for development one member is frequently
impressed, or controlled to make magnetic passes 225 over another to aid in his unfoldment; and
if such a thing should happen to you, and the influence is congenial, there need be no objection
raised by you; but beware of those people who claim to be able, by mesmerism, to develop you
into a medium in a given period of time."

Mediumistic Auto-Suggestion.
Other authorities have pointed out the fact that in some cases hypnotism has resulted in a sort of
pseudo-mediumship, or bogus mediumship, in which the control is not that of a real spirit, but is
merely the result of the suggestion of the hypnotizer, or else the auto-suggestion of the would-be
medium himself. A writer on the subject has said of this: "In too many cases, only the power of
auto-hypnotism is manifested, and we have obsession, fraud and folly as the result. There is one
sure method of detecting the auto-hypnotic trance, and showing the difference between that and
the genuine spirit trance. Any competent magnetist or hypnotiser can throw off the spell in all
cases of self-induced trance, unless it has reached the condition of complete catalepsy. But if a
spirit has induced the trance and controls the medium, it will laugh at the hypnotist's efforts to
restore him to the ordinary condition. The most unfortunate feature of this sorry business is that
the poor subject is self-deceived, and imagines that he is a full-fledged medium; and when he has
made some terrible break on the platform or elsewhere he shields himself by laying all the
responsibility upon some supposed spirit guide."

"Psychic Sponges."

226

A writer has also called the attention of young mediums to another undesirable class of psychic
hangers-on at seances, as follows: "There are some people who, when they sit in a circle, are
extremely helpful, and give off the right kind of force that readily blends with that of the
sensitive; but there are others who draw upon and appropriate the psychic forces which are
needed by the medium, or by the spirits through the medium. While they mean well, enjoy the
seances, and feel 'so much better' after them, the success of the circle is endangered so far as the
object for which it was formed is concerned. Such persons are 'psychic sponges,' and should be
requested to sit outside the circle, or be asked kindly to refrain from attending."

Investigate Your Spirits.

Finally, the young medium should understand the true nature of the spirits, and just how far he
may be safely guided by their advice and wishes. The instructions given by an intelligent spirit of
good character may be safely followed as a rule, but the character and general intelligence of a
particular spirit must first be ascertained through acquaintance with him. Until the character of a
spirit has been fully established, and his claim to intelligence well supported by his messages, the
medium will do well to rely on his or her own good judgment and intuition. As a writer has well
said: "The medium must keep a level head and proceed cautiously. He should never allow any
spirit, in or out of the body, to usurp his right of private judgment or exercise any undue
227 authority over him. Eternal vigilance is the price of liberty; you must use your own discretion
and try the spirits before you trust to them."

Spirits Are Still Human Beings.

Many persons seem to be under the impression that because a spirit happens to have passed out
of the body he will, of necessity, know the truth about every subject in the range of human
thought, and can make no mistakes, and can always work miracles. But this is a grave mistake; it
should always be remembered that a decarnate spirit is as much a human being as is an incarnate
spirit such as yourself; and not any better or worse, on the average, than yourself or other
incarnate spirits. One needs but to remember that all sorts and conditions of people are constantly
passing out on to the spirit plane, and that, at least for some time, they continue to be practically
the same kind of persons that they were on the earth plane. This being so, it will be seen that it
would be very unwise to surrender oneself indiscriminately to each and every kind of spirit who
happens to manifest his presence at a seance. Persons in the flesh should talk and reason with
those out of the flesh just as they would were the latter still on the earth-plane of life. A writer
well says: "In a developing circle many things can be tolerated, because both sides are
experimenting and 'feeling their way towards each other,' and it is difficult at first to know just
what is necessary or possible. But it is a safe rule to follow for one to refuse to be dictated to by
the spirits and to decline to go on blindly."

Beware of Domineering Spirits.

228

A writer has given the following good advice to young mediums, which such will do well to
heed: "Do not always be ready to be controlled, or to drop into a trance just because you 'feel the
influence,' and 'a spirit wants to say something,' or to oblige injudicious friends who 'wish you
would let him come.' Many people are very inconsiderate, and although they do not say so, they
think (and the sensitive feels their thought) 'I do wish he would go under control and tell me
something.' You should decline to be controlled except at the times when you voluntarily and
with set purpose lay yourself open to the influence of the spirits, in a properly constituted circle,
or when you are prepared for it. If the spirits cause you to do foolish or ridiculous things, gently
but firmly refuse to again submit. Do not be induced to yield by promise of future greatness and
success. Not a few people have had their vanity tickled and their ambitions aroused by the
flattery of crafty and domineering spirits, and in consequence they have been misled into doing
and saying very absurd and foolish things."

229

PART X
EXPERIENCES IN THE CIRCLE

When a circle of sensitive people has been formed, and the necessary preliminaries of the first
sitting have been completed, it is not at all infrequent that even at the first sitting there should be
more or less manifestation of spirit power. In many cases the sensitives among the sitters begin
to experience a peculiar sensation in their arms and hands, the latter being placed on the table in
front of them.

Signs of Spirit Presence.

There will be manifested in most cases a peculiar sense of heaviness or weight in the hands on
the table, and an impression that the hands are being held to the table as if by glue or other
adhesive material. In the arms are manifested peculiar tingling, pricking sensations, or a "needles
and pins" feeling, something akin to a gentle current of electricity passing along them.
Sometimes there is experienced the sensation of a gentle cool breeze passing over the sitters—
particularly over the backs of 230 their hands. In other cases there may be a sense of numbness or
partial loss of sensation, something akin to that experienced when a hand or arm "goes to sleep,"
as the popular phrase expresses it. In other cases there is manifested a peculiar jerking, twitching,
or vibration of the hands and arms, sometimes extending to the whole body of some of the
sitters. Sometimes the hand of the medium will begin to make motions as if he were trying to
write, and a pencil placed in his hands may trace crude figures or attempts at letters. At this stage
it will be found that the singing of hymns or similar music will tend to have a quieting, soothing,
harmonizing effect.

Spirit Rappings.

At the first sitting, or one shortly following after the first, it is likely that raps will be produced,
and communication established in this way. In such case the leader of the circle (not the
medium) should be sure to inform the spirits just what communicating code is to be used in the
circle, so that there may be no misunderstanding concerning the same. In such case he should
address the spirits as if there were several present, for such will most likely be the case. It must
be remembered, however, that the raps will not always come from the table. They may also, for
that matter, come from the wall, the ceiling, or from some of the furniture in the room. The table
raps come from the top of the table or under the table. Sometimes they sound like ordinary raps,
and then again they may give forth a peculiar hollow sound which is difficult to describe or to
definitely locate. The appearance of these 231 raps give positive proof that the conditions are
being established more or less fully, and the success of the circle is almost sure to follow.

Table Tippings.

Sometimes, however, in place of the raps being manifested by the spirit forces, there will instead
be manifested that peculiar tipping of the table which was the distinguishing characteristic of
early spiritualistic phenomena in the western countries. In this case the tipping of the table will
proceed just as in the case of the raps, so far as the transmission of messages is concerned. That
is to say, the table will tilt three times, one time, etc., in accordance with the code, just as in the
case of communication by means of the raps. In addition to this, however, the table may begin to
manifest strange motions; it may begin to raise itself, jump around, spin around on one leg, slide
across the rooms, etc. In such cases the hands of the sitters should be kept on the table, or if they
slip off they should be at once replaced thereupon. Sometimes heavy tables will manifest more
activity than the lighter ones.

The Spirit Signals.

When these rappings or table-tiltings begin to be manifested, all in the circle should keep cool
and calm, and should refuse to become agitated or excited. If the phenomena should be
apparently meaningless and disconnected, and resulting in no definite communication from the
other side, do not jump to the conclusion that the meaningless rapping or senseless table tipping
is the work of foolish spirits or flippant decarnate entities. On the contrary, you 232 must
remember that not only is your circle experimenting, but that the spirits on the other side are also
experimenting in hopes of securing proper conditions for intelligent communications and definite
messages. As we have said before, the spirits have their own troubles, as well as the sitters, and
both sides are really engaged in an effort to "find each other." As a writer has said: "Remember
also that you are merely experimenting, and that the spirit people are also, perhaps for the first
time, trying to penetrate the veil and utilize powers and agencies of which, in all probability, they
know as little as do you. So many disturbing factors exist—weather, varying psychical
conditions of the sitters, agitated mental states, too great expectancy, or anxiety for successful
demonstrations—that the true disposition to be maintained by the inquirer is that of the scientific
student, who carefully watches what transpires, and endeavors to discover the causes of failure as
well as the conditions which favor success."

Flashes of Communication.

In some cases the circle will have to sit several times before the persistent though disconnected
and apparently meaningless raps or table-tilts will begin to show positive signs of intelligent
signalling. The same thing would probably occur were the inhabitants of the planet Mars to find
themselves able to flash signals to our earth—for a long time the flashes would seem
meaningless to us, until at last they would seem to manifest a definite intelligent purpose and
rhythm. When this stage of the raps or table-tilts has been reached, then the leader of the circle
233 should acquaint the spirits with the code used, and ask definite questions concerning the
future conduct of the seance, the answers to which the spirits are requested to give through the
signal code of raps or tilts. When these answers begin to "come through" plainly and definitely,
then the seance enters a new phase.

Spirit Code Signals.

In this new phase, when once entered into, the formal set procedure to be followed will be about
as follows: The leader of the circle, recognizing the signs of the presence of spirits in the circle,
will address them and ask them whether or not there is a spirit present who wishes to convey a
message to the circle, or to any one present. Then the spirits signal back in the affirmative or the
negative. If the answer be in the affirmative, the circle leader asks the spirits to indicate by the
affirmative signal when the name of the right person present is named—and he then proceeds to
slowly and plainly name each person present, in succession, until the affirmative signal is
received. Or, he may ask the spirits to indicate the identity of the spirit friends present, when
their names are called; and he then proceeds to call over the names of the departed friends of
those present, as the same are requested by the sitters or visitors to the circle. When the right
name is reached, the spirits signal in the affirmative, either by raps of table-tilts, etc. After the
question-and-answer line of communication has been firmly and strongly established, more
definite information may be obtained by the instruction of the system of "alphabet calling," as
described in a preceding portion 234 of this book. In this system, the letters of the alphabet are
slowly and clearly called off, in succession, until the affirmative signal is given regarding the
letter just called, which indicates that that letter is to be marked down as a part of the sentence.
Wonderful messages have been received in this way, although the process is very slow and
somewhat tedious in the case of long messages.

Ouija Boards.

Of late years the sitters at circles have found a quicker method of obtaining "letter by letter"
messages by means of the apparatus called "the Ouija Board," which consists of a moving
"Planchette" with an indicator which moves over the letters marked on a board, the hands of the
sitters (or certain of their number) being placed on the table of the "Planchette." The indicator
moves over the line of letters, and indicates the letters of the message, one by one. The Ouija
Boards are sold at a moderate price, and will be found a valuable adjunct to any spiritualistic
circle. During the past few years, public attention has been strongly directed to this manner of
obtaining spirit communications by reason of newspaper notices concerning the same, and the
fact that several books have been written under spirit guidance imparted in this particular way.

A Home-Made Ouija Board.

A writer has given the following directions for making a "home-made Ouija Board," viz., "A
Planchette may be used as an 'Ouija' by laying down a sheet of paper upon which the letters of
the alphabet 235 have been written or printed in a fairly large semi-circle, the words 'Yes' or 'No'
being written at either end, and figures from 1 to 9 written straight across a little lower down.
Now remove the pencil and insert a small moderately sharpened stick as a pointer, and the
Planchette may run about, point to letters or numbers, answers your questions at 'Yes' or 'No,' or
messages may be spelt out as you watch its movements."

Trance or Inspirational Mediumship.

Through the development and unfoldment afforded by the development circle, the mediumistic
persons in that circle, particularly the medium who is "sitting for development" in the circle, will
in all probability develop that phase of mediumship caller "Trance Mediumship," or
"Inspirational Mediumship." Of this phase of mediumship a writer has said: "This mental phase
of mediumship involves the development of a degree of impressibility which may range from the
conscious reception of suggestion, or impulses, or thoughts from other intelligences, to the
lucidity on the spiritual plane which is displayed by conscious clear-seeing, or spirit-sight. The
phenomena of super-sensuous reception due to spirit influence are elicited in much the same way
as a mesmerist arouses the clairvoyant powers of his subject. The somnambulic sleep, or trance,
is induced in the subject whose voluntary powers are no longer under his control, and the
involuntary processes are well-nigh suspended. In this state his spirit sometimes gains a larger
degree of freedom, and is able to perceive on the inner or spiritual plane.

Symptoms of Trance Condition.

236

"If you are likely to become a trance-speaking medium, you will probably experience a sensation
as a falling or dizziness, as if you were going to faint; this may continue until you become
entirely unconscious on the external plane, and you will know no more until you regain your
normal condition, although, while under the influence of the operator, you may have been
speaking more or less coherently. He may not, at first, be able to convey the exact impression he
wishes to produce. His 'suggestion' is not strong enough to set your involuntary nerves vibrating
in just the way he desires; consequently his thought is not transferred to you in a manner which
insures faithful reproduction, and you should not be disappointed because of such imperfect
results at the outset. If your mind is filled with the desire to succeed, you will become too self-
conscious, and will thus destroy the very condition upon which success depends."

The Entranced State.

Another mediumistic writer says: "The entrancement usually takes place all at once, and the
entranced one passes into the realm of communication with the spirits without much warning of
any kind. When the medium is entranced it is highly essential that there be no commotion or fear
expressed in thought or action in the circle. It must be remembered that the welfare of the
medium depends a great deal on the conditions of the others present, and purity of thought and
pleasant expectation should be the first thing looked after when the entrancement occurs. In
passing into the trance, the 237 medium usually grows very pale and acts not unlike a person
going into a faint. But he or she must be allowed to pass behind the veil without any commotion.
When the entrancement is accomplished, the manifestations may take place in different ways.
There are, in fact, many forms of manifestation belonging to this particular phase of
mediumship, but they all come under the general rule and conditions."

Trance Phenomena.

Another writer has said: "In entering the trance condition of mediumship, you will probably
become semi-conscious, or perhaps almost completely unconscious. The influence will stimulate
your breathing, which will become rapid and irregular; your eyes will close and you will be
unable to open them, and your hands and body may twitch and jerk as if you were being
subjected to a series of galvanic shocks. The sitters should keep calm and sympathetic, but they
should check any tendency on the part of the medium to undue noise, or violence, or absurdity.
You will be aware of what you are doing, but will be unable to fully exercise the will to interfere
or try to stop. You will most likely become conscious of an impulse to do something, or to blurt
out certain words. If you resist, you will only make the task more difficult and hinder the
attainment of the end you have in view. Your best course is to hold your judgment in suspense;
so do not be hostile or critical, but act out your impressions.

Entering the Trance.

"Let the influence have its course—say what you feel you must say, and never mind about your
own 238 state of consciousness. You will be much more likely to pass into the unconsciousness
of the trance (if you desire to do so) if you say, 'Now, spirit friend, I trust myself to you, and will
yield my body and brain to your control, for you to do the best you can with and through me. I
am willing to co-operate with you for the time being, and trust you to do your utmost for the
good of others.' It is not necessary that you should be utterly unconscious, although you may
think it is, to prove that another intelligence is operating upon and through you. The evidence of
that fact will be displayed in the nature of the message and the unusual ability displayed by you
when under the stimulating influence of the operator.

Advice to Trance Mediums.

"Most mediums find that their powers vary. Sometimes there seems to be a high degree of
lucidity. The impressions which they receive are clear and strong; and the ideas seem to flow
through them freely, and the quality of the inspirations is exhilarating, and they feel strengthened
and uplifted. But there are other days when they feel very much alone. The influence that affects
them is weak; they get only hazy impressions, and there is a woeful lack of ideas. It seems as if
the heavens were brass, or that they themselves were unresponsive. They know not why, but
whatever they can 'lay hold of' to speak, or whatever the spirit people can project into their
sphere seems forced and incomplete. If you should ever have these experiences, turn your
attention to something else. Do not 'harp on one 239 string' too much. Physical exercise, change
of scene, social company, and rest, will soon restore your tone and renew your powers."

Speaking Mediumship.

In that form of Trance or Inspirational Mediumship generally known as "Speaking Mediumship,"

the communicating spirit assumes partial or complete control of the vocal organs of the medium,
and the spirit then directly addresses the circle or audience of listeners, just as he would do were
he, himself, actually in the flesh confronting them and using his own vocal organs. In such
addressing the spirit manifests many of the characteristics which distinguished him during his
earth life. The medium's voice is changed, and his manner takes on a quite different form, i.e.,
that of the spirit which he possessed in his own earth life. In fact, in some cases, it has actually
been observed that the very body of the medium seemed to either shrink, or else enlarge, as if
taking the form of the etheric framework of the controlling spirit.

Public Speaking Under Control.

A writer gives the following advice concerning Speaking Mediumship: "Should you be
controlled to give public addresses, it will be best to withhold the name of the spirit who prompts
or controls your utterances. Most intelligent spirits prefer to be known by their teachings, rather
than by the names they bore when on earth. If the addresses are eloquent and beautiful, and the
thoughts presented are good and true, they will be acceptable on their own 240 merits, and would
not be one bit more valuable because they were inspired by some well-known historical persons.
Whereas, if you announce the name of a spirit, your hearers may consider that the address does
not come up to the standard of the ability displayed by that individual before he dies, and may
discredit and discard the good that they might otherwise have found in your utterances."

Spirit Advice and Counsel.

If spirits voluntarily tender you their advice upon business matters, especially if they are friends
or relatives whom you know and trust, and who, when here, were capable and experienced
business people, you may well give heed to their counsel, even though you may not feel it wise
to follow it; but do not make a practice of going to the spirits for information concerning trade or
finance. Why should you expect that wise and enlightened spirits should concern themselves
about stocks and shares, commerce, or manufacturing? Probably they knew but little about these
things when they were here, and have no heed for such knowledge over there; and it will be well
for you to learn to live your own life, do your business, and accept the ordinary duties and
responsibilities which naturally devolve upon you. Let mediumship be a part of your education
and development, not the whole.
Impersonating Manifestations.
It will often happen that some spirit will take control of the medium for the purpose of
communicating with a friend present in the circle or audience, 241 and for the purpose of
positively identifying himself to that friend, he may deem it necessary to cause you to
impersonate himself as he was during his earth life. In such cases you will experience a peculiar
feeling of undergoing a complete transformation of personality, and often a dual-personality for
the time being. Another instance of this kind is where a spirit wishing to communicate with
friends, and this being his first opportunity to manifest in the impersonating phase, he may yield
to that peculiar psychic law which seems to operate in the direction of causing a spirit,
manifesting for the first time, to enact his dying experiences, and to manifest a pantomimic
reproduction of his last hours preceding death. In such cases, the medium reproduces, in a most
startlingly real manner, the movements, ways of breathing, coughing, gestures, ejaculations, and
may even go so far as to utter the "last words" of the dying man whose spirit now controls the
medium. Every medium should be prepared for an experience of this kind, for it will sometimes
completely upset a medium unfamiliar with it, and not knowing just what it all means.

Incidents of Impersonations.

In a case such as stated above, the medium will probably find himself either partially or
completely conscious of what is being said and done by the spirit through his body or vocal
organs. He will naturally strive to escape the utterance of the strange cries, moans, vocal gasps
and efforts, and the dead cries and farewell words of the dying man or woman. Some mediums
have felt at such times as if they were losing their reason, and they have struggled to 242 throw
off the spirit control and influence in order to regain their mental balance. The best mediums
advise the young mediums to keep as cool, calm, and collected as possible in such cases, and not
to allow themselves to become panic-stricken. A writer on the subject has said: "Trust to the
sincerity of the spirit and the good sense of the sitters, and throw off your fear. Yield obedience
to your control, and neither help nor hinder it. Just do and say what you feel you have to do or
say, and leave the results. You cannot, or should not, be held responsible for failure by the sitters,
if there is no recognition; and by responding and giving free course to the suggestion, which
reaches you as an impulse or mental impression, greater success will follow, and the
development you seek will be promoted. If, however, you find that the impersonations are
untrue, and the sitters are unable to interpret or recognize what you do or say after you have
followed out your impressions a number of times, then resist them with all your strength of will,
and require from the spirit the proof of his identity in some other way."

Incidents of Inspirational Mediumship.

Another writer speaking concerning inspirational mediumship, has said: "In inspirational
speaking it will be noted that the medium often gives a really wonderful speech, although he may
naturally be a very poor conversationalist. These speeches are often preserved and some of them
form exceptionally interesting literature. These speeches are generally given when the medium is
seated, but sometimes he loses balance and falls to the floor. Still, as long as the spirit control has
anything to say, he will say 243 it through the vocal organs of the medium. But it must always be
borne in mind that a medium does not, as a general rule, become an inspirational speaker all at
once. There is a stage of development through which he must pass in which the spirit control
assumes charge of the body of the medium, and this takes some time and is usually accomplished
in steps. First, the medium gives evidence of inspirational speaking by uttering guttural sounds,
and very often his mouth merely moves without giving forth any sound whatever. Little by little
the control gains access to the inner atmosphere of the medium, and when he has broken the final
barriers, he can speak and act and deliver what he has to say. But it must be remembered that the
mind of the medium is not to be left out of the question entirely. He is often called upon to aid in
the interpretation of the speeches the spirit delivers, and these he may misinterpret and lend to
them color of his own mentality, without his conscious intention to do so, however."

Value of Identification.

In impersonation mediumship, however, no matter how interesting the manifestation may be, it is
of prime importance that the identity of the spirit should be clearly established, providing that the
spirit himself claims positively to be some particular individual; this, of course, does not apply to
instances in which the spirit does not claim identity with any particular departed person, and
where the communications are given anonymously. It is this feature of identification that renders
this phase of mediumship so valuable and important. A well-known 244 medium, in a trance
state, once delivered the following message from a spirit: "Impersonation mediumship is the
most valuable that the world can possibly have today. When by the aid of the impersonating
medium, the inquirer is enabled to converse with his beloved deceased friends, and they make
themselves actually visible in the personality of the medium, plain to consciousness and
understanding, and tell him specifically points and facts of identity and experience that are
utterly beyond the power of any other intelligence to tell, then he has something borne in upon
him through the senses of sight, of hearing and understanding that appeals to him. Therefore, the
impersonating medium is the most valuable medium you can present to inquirers." Another
mediumistic writer has said: "This kind of mediumship carries conviction of the real presence of
the so-called dead, and your aim should be to get into communication with the intelligent
operator at the other end of the line, and elicit from him evidences of his identity and purpose.
Table movements, raps, materializations, writings, messages, or controls, are of comparatively
little value unless by their agency you can secure proofs of the personal identity and survival
after death of your departed friends, or some indications of a rational purpose on the part of the
operator."

Fraudulent Claims of Identity.

We would be lacking in our sense of duty and obligation toward our readers, however, were we
to refrain from calling their attention to the fact that positive and strict identification of the
spirits, in cases where identity is claimed, is a duty on the 245 part of investigators, particularly
on the part of those who happen to be relatives or friends of the deceased person whose presence
and identity are being claimed by the controlling spirit who is manifesting the impersonation. As
we have said, elsewhere, we must remember that there are all kinds of decarnate spirits, just as
there are all kinds of incarnate spirits; and that the nature of a spirit is not greatly changed by
passing out of the body. Just as there are imposters on the earth plane, so are there imposters on
the spirit plane. And, accordingly, caution is to be exercised on both planes. The following
quotations from mediumistic writers will serve to illustrate this point, and to show that the best
mediumistic authorities themselves insist upon this precaution being taken.

Guarding Against Fraudulent Spirits.

One writer says: "While most mediums seek for some guide or control of prominence, it must
not be always taken for granted that the controlling spirit during a seance is always just what he
claims to be. For instance, a spirit control might give his name as Henry Clay, and he might
deliver a spirited talk or oration, which, however, would be reeking with grammatical errors.
Even though he insist that he is Henry Clay, our reason will tell us that he is not what he pretends
to be. The change which we call death cannot lead all spirits to reform, and there are many who,
as in earth life, are unworthy of our association, and should be gotten rid of as soon as they
appear. When these fraudulent spirits appear, the atmosphere of the circle should be made very
sacred and high in character. Evil spirits, 246 and those of low characters, cannot endure the
presence of elevated and high thoughts, and by the holding of thoughts of this character the circle
can soon rid itself for good of these troublesome entities—and it should do so without fail."

Spirit Jokers.

Another writer says, on this point: "That there are spirits who sometimes impersonate, and seek
to pass themselves off as friends of the sitters, cannot be denied; in fact, we have had personal
proof of the same on several occasions. But these troublesome and vexatious visitors invariably
get 'bowled out' if the investigators are observant and careful. In fact, such entities are neither as
numerous, or as evilly disposed, as many persons imagine them to be. There are spirits who 'play
up to' the weaknesses and flatter the vanity of those to whom they communicate. And it is
equally true that there are spirits who give glowing assurances of the good things that they will
perform by-and-by, and profess to be some of the 'great ones' of the past, is equally true. It is a
well-known saying that 'people love a lord,' and this amiable weakness is fully realized by the
jokers on the other side—but the fault does not wholly rest with them! Their too confiding and
credulous mediums are too often in the main responsible for their own mystification and
misleading. They are often so anxious to be guided by some 'eminent' person who will be to
them an 'authority,' that they practically invite spirit pretenders to fool them to the top of their
bent. This does not apply to all cases of real or supposed deception, but it does cover a large
proportion of such experiences. In 247 many instances there is an element of self-deception—or
auto-suggestion—and the 'wish becomes father to the thought,' and the sensitive medium's
unrestrained imaginative powers do the rest."

A Typical Case of Identification.

The following typical case of undoubted identification of a visiting spirit is related by Smedley
in his work concerning spiritualistic experiences, and may be taken as a pattern to be followed by
investigators in demanding and obtaining proofs of identity in cases where same is asserted. The
medium in this case was a woman of high standing in spiritualistic circles, and the seance took
place in Mr. Smedley's own home. The medium was at that time a perfect stranger to the
Smedley family, and to their little circle of invited friends. The seance was opened by the singing
of hymns, and before long the medium went under control. Mr. Smedley says: "She passed under
the control of an intelligent being, opened her eyes, and manifested the greatest amazement." He
then relates the subsequent experience as follows:

Recalling Past Incidents.

"After looking around the room very deliberately at various objects, then at one person after
another, and fixing her eyes on my wife, she ran across the room, and throwing her arms around
my wife's neck, she kissed her most affectionately, addressing her as 'My dear sister.' After
speaking with my wife in endearing terms, she came across the room to me, 248 and placing her
right hand on my shoulder, said: 'Well, my dear brother.' (This was exactly as a deceased sister
of my wife had been in the habit of doing.) 'How unspeakingly glad I am for such a privilege as
this! When we used to sit by the hearth at night, conversing on various topics that used to interest
us so much, we little expected we should ever have such a privilege. You know we used to sit up
at night discussing theological questions till the embers in the grate died out, and sometimes a
chiding voice from upstairs cried out: "Alfred, Alfred, do come to bed. Do you know what time
it is? You know Charlotte is not fit to sit up so late."' This was precisely what had taken place,
the exact words being used.

Identifying Property.

"She referred to a number of incidents known only to her and ourselves. She asked for an album
in which she had written the dedication, pointing this out, and also various pieces of poetry she
had written in it. She asked for a hymn-book, and desired us to sing what had been her favorite
hymn, which at my request she instantly found. She next asked for a Bible, and asked me to read
her favorite Psalm. I requested her to find it, although I knew well which it was. She turned to it
instantly, and I read: 'The Lord is my shepherd,' etc. When the Psalm was finished, the medium
stood transfigured before us; her countenance was radiant, and her eyes bright with a heavenly
light. Turning to my wife, she said: 'Sister, dear, by inviting strangers to your house tonight you
have entertained angels 249 unawares!' After the meeting, the medium remarked: 'When under
control I was strongly influenced to look around for a picture, but could not find it. I do not know
what it meant, but the control was anxious to find a picture.' My wife replied: 'My sister painted
a picture of the Saviour bearing His cross, many years ago, and it now hangs in our dining room.'
The above incidents, combined with her mannerisms, and bearing in mind that the medium was
an entire stranger to us, and uneducated, were sufficient evidence of the presence and influence
of her deceased sister to cause my wife to exclaim, 'Of a truth, that was my sister Charlotte!'"

Identifying Historical Personages.

Of course, a close, personal identification, similar to that stated in the above recital, is impossible
in cases when the spirit claims to be some well-known historical personage. But in the last
named class of cases it will be found possible to ask questions concerning the life and career of
the supposed celebrity, and to form a general idea of the correctness of the claim by the quality
and general character of the answers given. It will be found that genuine spirits are nearly always
anxious to definitely establish the truth of their claims to identity, and will often go to great pains
to do so. The character of the language employed, the grammar followed, and the general
evidence of the intellectual capacity of the spirit, all these will be found useful in testing cases of
claimed identity; and no genuine spirit has any just cause to object to such tests and questions, if
made in the proper scientific spirit, and with ordinary 250 politeness. In short, treat the spirit just
as you would were he in the flesh, speaking to you over a telephone, and endeavoring to
establish his identity; this will always be a safe and just rule to employ and follow.

251

PART XI
HIGHER SPIRIT MANIFESTATIONS

We frequently hear of, and witness manifestations of, what is called "spirit psychometry," "spirit
clairvoyance," and "spirit clairaudience." In the earlier chapters of the present book we have
spoken of the psychic principles and laws underlying psychometry, clairvoyance, and
clairaudience. We have seen that all of these forms and phases of psychic phenomena are capable
of being produced independent of spirit guidance, control, or influence. In fact, most of such
manifestations are so produced, even when they are considered to be phases of spirit
mediumship. But, outside of these manifestations, there are found cases in which such
phenomena are produced by the aid, influence, and assistance, if not indeed the direct power of,
the controlling spirits of the medium.

Spirit Psychometry and Clairvoyance.

In those instances in which the controlling influence of such phenomena is clearly that of
disembodied 252 spirits, we find two distinct classes of the same, as follows: (1) cases in which
the spirits aided in the establishing of the psychic rapport, and thus rendered more efficient,
clear, and strong; (2) cases in which the spirits exerted their own psychometric, clairvoyant or
clairaudient power, and then communicated the result through their mediums to the circle. In the
first of above classes, the psychic faculties of the medium really perform the work, although
greatly aided by the addition of the psychic power of the spirit. In the second of the above
classes, the work is performed solely by the psychic powers of the spirits, and the medium acts
merely as the line of communication between spirit and the circle. It must be remembered that
the spirits who have passed out of the body are possessed of the same order of psychic faculties
as are those still in the body, and that, likewise, on both planes there is a great variation of the
degree of such powers between different individuals.
 Spirit Psychic Assistance.

From the above, it will be seen that a mediumistic person may practice in psychometry,
clairvoyance, and clairaudience, either with or without the assistance of the spirits. In case the
spirits are assisting in the direction of performing the psychic work themselves, and then
communicating the result to the medium, the medium of course has but to remain passive and
receive the communication. In cases, however, in which the spirits assist merely by strengthening
the psychic power of the medium by aiding in the production of the rapport conditions, 253 or by
lending the psychic power to add to that of the medium, then the medium has but to proceed just
as we have pointed out in the earlier portions of this book devoted to the subjects of
psychometry, clairvoyance, etc.

Writing Mediumship.

In what is known as "writing mediumship" the medium's hand is controlled by the spirit, and is
caused to write messages to those present, or to answer questions propounded by some of those
present at the circle. In some quarters such writing is called "automatic writing," but inasmuch as
this last term is also applied to cases in which the hand of the person writes a message telepathed
by a living person, it would seem that the old term "writing mediumship" is still the best one to
use in the cases in which the spirit control is using the hand of the medium for the purpose of
communication. The following statements made by different mediumistic writers on this
particular subject will prove interesting and instructive to the young mediums seeking
development along the lines of this special phase of mediumship.

Incidents of Writing Mediumship.

One writer says: "If the medium reaches the writing stage, he generally passes into it in much the
same manner that he does into the inspirational speaking. That is, he becomes entranced, and in
entrancement of this kind he usually loses his conscious self, although it is not essential that he
should do so. He may remain partially conscious, but he 254 will be very pale and will have no
control whatever over the hand which does the writing. When the hand that writes is generally
the only part of him that becomes numb, one entire side may become limp and inactive, and it is
at this stage that a pencil must be placed in his hand all ready for writing, and a large sheet of
heavy paper be put on the table before him. It is urged that the pencil be a heavy one, and the
paper tough and coarse, for the first writing of a writing medium is not even a fair specimen of
penmanship, being heavy and very difficult to decipher. As his hand wanders here and there, his
body may sway and the pencil be brought in contact with the paper. When he begins to write, the
strokes are crude and jerky and uncertain. The first notes that he delivers to the sitters are very
often difficult to make out, and sometimes it is impossible to tell what they are. But this
condition will be gradually overcome until the writing is very fair, and finally it can be written
on much finer paper and with an ordinary pencil. When questions are to be asked, they may be
put direct to the medium, and the answers will be written out and signed by the spirit sending
them. As the medium develops, it will not be necessary for him to have the questions put to him
verbally. Write the questions on a little slip of paper, and place these slips in his hands. The spirit
will read them, and then use his arm as before in writing out answers. But this stage cannot be
attained in a day or a week, and it is a sign of the higher forms of development, and should be
looked upon by the members of the circle as evidence of the highest order establishing the great
success they have attained."

Developing Writing Mediumship.

255

Another writer on the subject of writing mediumship says to those developing this phase of
mediumship: "Your hands may be caused to shake and move about as if you desired to write.
You may be quite conscious, or only semi-conscious, but you will feel that you are unable to
prevent the movements. In such a case, the sitters should provide pencil and paper and await
results. They should speak to the control and request him to work quietly, and in all probability
the rapid preliminary scrawls will soon give place to slower and more legible writing. Many
persons have developed as writing mediums who have never sat in a circle, and without being
entranced. We should advise you, if you decide to sit alone and make experiments in this
direction, to avoid excitement, expectancy, and preconceptions. Proceed as though you were
speaking to a visible friend, and request that someone will move your hands to write. Provide
yourself with a writing pad, or several sheets of paper, and while holding a pencil in readiness,
withdraw your thoughts from your hand and arm, and assume a passive condition. If you are
strongly mediumistic, words and sentences may be written, but you need hardly expect such
results at first."

Stead's Method and Results.

W. T. Stead, the eminent English investigator, said: "I hold my pen in the ordinary way, but
when the writing is beginning I do not rest my wrist or arm upon the paper, so as to avoid the
friction, and to give the influence, whatever it may be, more complete 256 control of the pen. At
first, the pen is apt to wander into mere scrawling, but after a time it writes legibly. Unlike many
automatic writers who write as well blindfolded as when they read what they write as they are
writing it, I can never write so well as when I see the words as they come. There is danger in this,
which is most clearly illustrated When my hand writes verse—especially rhymed verse—for the
last word in each line suggests to my conscious mind a possible rhyme for the ending of the
following line; this rouses up my mind, my own ideas get mixed with those of the
communicating intelligence, and confusion is the result." The above statement of Mr. Stead
becomes doubly interesting and valuable when we remember that through his hand, controlled by
a spirit intelligence, came that wonderful series of messages afterward published under the title
of "Letters from Julia," which book excited the attention and interest of the civilized world at the
time of its publication, and even to this day enjoys a great popularity.

Automatic Writing vs. Inspirational Writing.

Another writer says: "Inspirational or impressional writing is frequently mistaken for that which
is more purely passive or automatic. The medium or sensitive person experiences a strong
impulse to write, but does not receive any clear or consecutive train of thought. He sets down
one word, and then others follow as fast as he can indicate them, but he must begin to write
before the complete sentence is given to him. In other cases, the thoughts flow into his
consciousness faster than his pen can record them; but in the truly 'automatic' form of
communication 257 the mind of the sensitive is not consciously affected. He can read and think
about other and entirely different subjects, and need take no more interest in the work than he
would if his hand did not belong to him nor than if a spirit laid hold of and guided the pencil.
Some mediums who write automatically have to be mentally quiet; they find that if the mind is
preoccupied the hand will not write, although, even in such cases, it frequently happens that the
amanuensis is ignorant of the communication until he reads it afterwards."

Use and Abuse of Automatic Writing.

J. A. White, a trance and clairvoyant medium himself, says of the phase of writing mediumship:
"There is a great tendency, particularly in cases of automatic writing, to do too much of it. No
sooner do some people find that the pencil will move, than they spend all their spare time in this
fascinating pursuit, which, in their undeveloped state, I believe to be a dangerous and unwise
practice. They are apt to exclaim, when any question arises during the day: 'Let us see what the
spirits have to say.' This, carried to extremes, leads to one thing, and one thing only—obsession.
I believe in fixing a time, and, unless in exceptional cases, refusing to sit at any other. Of course
I am speaking of mediumship when it is in its budding stage. A developed medium can judge for
himself, and knows from experience how far to go. It is a favorite trick of a certain class of
spirits when they find they have a sensitive who can 'feel' them, to give them that pricking
sensation in the arm which denotes their presence. 'So-and-so wants to write,' and away
258 rushes the medium for the pencil, and sits down. This I do not believe in. I have seen far
more harm than good come from it. The proper way to develop, in my opinion, is to sit at home
in a small, carefully selected circle, two or three times a week, at stated hours, and with a
competent conductor who knows what he is doing."

Advice to Writing Mediums.

A French medium says: "We urge beginners in their own interest not to take up the pencil for
automatic writing, or to sit at a table for communications at any free moment, without rhyme or
reason, for disorder in experiment is one of the first and most serious dangers to be avoided. An
absolutely strict rule should be made not to attempt the effort more than once every other day."
Another writer says: "The communications that are received by the various forms of passive,
impressional, automatic, and inspirational writing must not be regarded as valuable merely
because of the conditions under which they were obtained, nor because of their spirit origin, real
or supposed. Under all circumstances receive with the utmost reserve and caution long-winded
communications from notable characters who claim to be 'Napoleon Bonaparte,' 'Lord Bacon,'
'Socrates,' or other great personages; for in the majority of cases, the value of the communication
is exactly the reverse of the importance of the name attached. This applies to automatic writings
quite as much as to spoken messages. Judge the statement made by the ordinary standards, apart
from their claimed exalted origin. If rational, beautiful, and spiritually helpful and enlightening,
259 they are worth having on their own merits; but if they are unreasonable, wild or dogmatic, or
pretentious and flattering, they should be discarded; and, unless you change their character after
repeated experiments, your attention should be turned in some other direction."

Drawing Mediumship.
What is known as "drawing mediumship" is but a variation of writing mediumship, at least so far
as is concerned the nature of the manifestation. In both cases the spirit control moves the hand of
the medium, in one case forming letters and words, and in the other case forming figures,
designs, etc. In some rare instances, the spirit control operating through the hand of the medium
has produced crayon drawings, water color sketches, and even oil paintings, although the
medium himself or herself, was unable to even draw a straight line, much less to execute a
finished drawing or painting. The principle governing such mediumship, and the development,
thereof, is precisely the same as that governing the phase of writing mediumship previously
described.

The Planchette.

From time to time, during the past fifty years, there have been invented or arranged various
forms of mechanical contrivances designed to assist in the development of writing mediumship.
The most popular of these has been the Planchette, which has enjoyed great popularity for many
years past. The Planchette is a little heart-shaped board, having two 260 legs, with tiny wheels at
the end, attached to the board. Near the pointed end of the heart-shaped board is a hole, into
which a pencil is inserted. A sheet of paper of good size is spread upon a table, and the
Planchette is placed thereupon. Then the sitter, or two sitters, place their hand or hands upon the
board—generally resting only the tips of their fingers lightly upon it. The sitter or sitters then
await results.

How to Use the Planchette.

If the sitter is mediumistic the Planchette will begin to move about slowly at first, gradually
gathering force and definite direction. After a few preliminary strokes, circles, or lines having
been drawn, the Planchette will seem to have been firmly taken hold of by some spirit hand, and
will begin to write words and sentences in a more or less 'scrawly' fashion. When the writing
once begins, questions may be asked of and answered by the spirits. Some persons report that to
them the Planchette seems to move by itself, pulling their hands with it; but others report that
they feel the movement of their arms and hands, as the spirit propels the machine in the work of
waiting. Some know what is being written during the process, while others do not know what has
been written until they afterwards read it. Sometimes the writing begins Boon after the sitting is
commenced, while in other cases the sitters have to wait a long time, or even to sit several times
before the writing actually begins. Sometimes the Planchette will refuse to write for certain
persons, but will write freely for others. The general advice is to exercise patience in the
261 Planchette sittings, and not to expect to get the best results at once; and, particularly, not to
begin asking questions immediately after the writing begins.

Healing Mediumship.

Some mediums seem to be particularly adapted to the work of healing by psychic force, and this
phase of mediumship is known as "healing mediumship." The healing medium is guided
principally by the spirit influence, so far as is concerned the choice of methods of procedure in
his healing work. The following directions, however, given by a mediumistic writer, will give the
young medium a very good, practical general idea of the procedure to be followed in case his
spirit control does not indicate some other method. This writer says:

How to Heal by Spirit Power.

"If you are impressed with the idea that you possess healing power, you can easily experiment
upon your suffering friends or acquaintances. If you are mediumistic, and spirits desire to
develop you for the healing work, you will readily feel that you are impressed what to do. Your
hands will be guided to the proper position, and you will spontaneously make the requisite
passes. Magnetic healing has really nothing to do with massage, the induction of sleep, or with
any form of mesmerism or hypnotism. The healing medium should centre his thought and
interest solely and wholly with the idea of effecting a cure. He will need to be sympathetic, but
hopeful. Do not let your patient think about his ailments, but arouse his thought and engage his
262 attention upon some outside subject. Make him feel comfortable, and lead him to expect good
results; to do this you must be affirmative and confident. Unless you are impressed, or are
controlled, to do otherwise, sit in front and take hold of the hands of the sufferer for a time, then
make gentle, short, downward passes over the part affected, and conclude with long sweeping
passes from head to foot without contact. For local affections, point your hands at or just touch
the spot with your finger tips, or make direct horizontal or slightly downward movements, as if
you were throwing something at him. A warm, comfortable room is favorable to magnetizing,
and a genial mental atmosphere, created by cheerful and kindly minds in the operator and
persons present, will contribute largely to the success of the treatment. You will do well to act
upon your impressions and make the passes in whatever way you feel impelled or compelled. If
you operate under spirit guidance, you will be impressed more or less clearly how to proceed in
each case. In all probability you may sympathetically 'take on,' and be affected by, the symptoms
of the disease from which the patient suffers, and in that way be able to form an accurate
diagnosis of the case; but you must guard against exhaustion, and should always 'throw off' from
yourself the influence that you have received, and wash your hands thoroughly after each
treatment."

Materialization Mediumship.

One of the rarest, and at the same time the most eagerly sought after phase of mediumship, is that
known as "materialization mediumship." In this 263 phase of mediumship the decarnate spirit is
able to draw upon the vital forces of the medium, and those present at the seance, to such effect
that it may clothe itself with a tenuous, subtle form of matter, and then exhibit itself to the sitters
in the same form and appearance that it had previously presented in its earth life. Many of the
most remarkable testimonies to the truth and validity of spiritualism have been obtained through
this phase of mediumship, and it is the aim of all investigators to witness, and of most mediums
to be the channel of the production of, this remarkable phase of mediumistic phenomena.
In almost all instances of materialization phenomena in the record of modern spiritualism we
find that a cabinet was employed. There are two main reasons advanced for the necessity of the
cabinet in this phase of mediumistic phenomena. The first of said reasons is that in many cases
darkness has been found necessary for the preliminary work of the materialization, although
absolute darkness is not necessary in the general room in which the materialized spirit forms
afterward appear. The second of the said reasons is that there seems to be a psychic atmosphere
created by the blending of the spirit forces with those of the medium, which atmosphere must be
kept apart from and unmixed with the auras of the members of the outside circle or the general
visitors at the seance.

Why the Cabinet Is Necessary.

Just what is the technical reason for this necessity is a source of argument and dispute among the
different 264 authorities on the subject, and it may be said that the matter is not as yet definitely
settled. But whatever may be such technical explanation, the fact remains that the seclusion of
the medium has been found almost absolutely necessary for the production of the phenomena of
spirit materialization. The few exceptions noted in the history of modern spiritualism only go to
establish the general rule. For the purpose of a general study of the subject, it may be accepted as
a general fact that the production of spirit materialization has as one of its necessary conditions
the presence and use of a dark cabinet in which the medium is secluded from the circle or
assemblage of persons attending the seance.

How to Make the Spirit Cabinet.

One of the best kind of cabinets for this purpose is a small alcove room, or other small room
adjoining the room in which the visitors sit at the seance. A large closet will also answer the
purpose very well, in fact many mediums prefer the closet to any other form of cabinet. If neither
small room or closet is available, then it becomes necessary to build or erect a cabinet for the
medium. One of the simplest and least expensive methods of building or erecting a cabinet for
the medium is as follows: Take a large piece of dark cloth, cotton or woolen, or else a large
shawl, and fasten it by stout twine or cord across a corner of the room. It will be better if the
curtain is made in two pieces, so as to allow it to part in the middle for the purpose of the entry
and exit of the medium, and for the purpose of allowing the materialized spirit form to show
itself to the circle. It 265 is not necessary that all light be excluded from the cabinet, and therefore
it need cause no worriment if a little light filters in over the top of the curtain; but the lights in
the main room should be kept burning "dim and low," not only for the purpose of aiding in the
actual work or materialization, but also in order to preserve the proper conditions when the
materialized spirit presents itself between the opened curtains.

How to Use the Spirit Cabinet.

When the cabinet is properly arranged the medium enters it and sits down on a chair provided for
that purpose. He should not be disturbed thereafter, but should be encouraged and aided in his
work by the maintenance of a quite, reverent mental attitude on the part of the members of the
circle. It will be found helpful if a few hymns are sung while waiting for manifestations from the
cabinet. The best way to encourage materialization at a regular circle is for gradual steps to be
taken leading up to this high phase of phenomena. For example, the circle should sit in the
ordinary way at its regular meetings, and devote itself to the production of the lesser forms of
phenomena. Then, before adjournment, the medium may go into the cabinet while the circle sits
for materialization phenomena. This practice may be made to form a regular part of the
proceedings of the circle. But the circle must be very patient concerning the production of this
class of phenomena, for the necessary conditions are very difficult to develop, even when aided
by the most powerful spirits. Many sittings may be required before even the slightest sign of
materialization is 266 obtained—but the final result will repay much waiting and watching, much
patience and much perseverance. But sooner or later the phenomena will come if the proper
conditions are provided for them.

Spirit Phosphorescence.

The first evidence of the presence and activity of the spirit forces striving to produce the
phenomena and materialization will probably be the appearance of peculiar hazy phosphorescent
lights playing in front of the curtain forming the front of the cabinet. These lights will consist of
small globules or balls of phosphorescent light that will dance about, like the familiar will-o'-the-
wisp seen over swamps and in damp, woody places. These lights will flit here and there, will
alternately appear and disappear. Sometimes they will appear as if a multitude of fire-flies were
clustered in front of the curtain. When these fire balls appear the circle may know that it is well
on the way to perfect materializations.

Appearance of Materialized Substance.

As the power increases, and the conditions become stabilized and perfected, the manifestations
will become more pronounced. It often happens that cloudy nebulous bodies of psychic
substance are formed and float around in front of the cabinet, like clouds of steam or vapor
illumined by a dim phosphorescent light. Sometimes attempts will seem to have been made to
form these clouds into the semblance of the human body, and often these bodies are more or less
incomplete, as for instance the arms may be missing, or else there may be dark holes 267 where
the eyes, nose, and mouth should be. It may be stated here that the sitters should not be
frightened by these sights, nor should mental agitation be permitted to manifest too strongly, as
such conditions act to retard further developments. Sometimes perfect hands and arms
materialize, but apparently not attached to a body. These hands may float out over the circle, and
may touch the members thereof. In rare cases these hands take articles handed them by members
of the circle, which articles are then "dematerialized" and vanish from sight, afterward appearing
in other parts of the house. Large articles of furniture have been known to be dematerialized in
this way.

Materialized Spirit Forms.

Later on, the nebulous spirit forms will take on more definite lines and form, and will become
more plainly visible, and will also assume a far more "solid" appearance. When the phenomena
reaches its highest phases, the materialized spirit forms can be plainly seen and actually
recognized by their friends in earth life. In some cases they will actually leave the front of the
curtain and will walk down among the sitters, shaking hands with them, touching them on the
cheek, or even embracing some loved one. In rare cases these materialized forms are able to
converse with the sitters in the circle, just as plainly as when in earth life.

Scientific Proof of Materialization.

It is not the purpose of this book to prove the existence of mediumistic phenomena—rather it
points out the means and methods whereby the student may 268 obtain such proof for himself or
herself. But it may be suggested here that the sceptic may find an abundance of proof of the
genuineness of materialization phenomena in the records and reports made by eminent scientists,
statesmen, and others. Particularly, the report of Sir William Crookes, the eminent English
scientist, will furnish such proof to the inquirer who demands "scientific proof" before he will
believe anything out of the usual. Sir William Crookes has given convincing evidence of the
genuineness of spirit materialization, even going so far to offer records of the weight of
materialized spirits, and their photographs taken by him—in some instances the photographs
showing the forms of both medium and spirit materialization.

How to Conduct a Materializing Seance.

In sitting for materialization, the circle should maintain the same general demeanor that it
observes at other times. Silence or dignified conversation may be indulged in, but joking or
levity should be forbidden. Hands should be held, and reverent singing indulged in. It should be
remembered that this phase of mediumistic phenomena is not something apart and distinct from
the lesser phases which have been described in detail in this book. On the contrary, it is simply a
matter of degree, and the same general principles underlie all phases of mediumistic phenomena.
Therefore, it is not necessary to repeat the instructions regarding the conduct of the circle, or the
rules for the development of the medium. Read the earlier chapters for the same, which are
equally applicable in this place as in the places in which they originally appeared.

Trumpet Mediumship.

269

In what is known as "trumpet mediumship," the sound of the voice of the communicating spirit is
increased in power by the use of a trumpet shaped arrangement of paper, card-board, tin, or
aluminum. There is no particular virtue in the material used, and anyone may make a serviceable
trumpet out of heavy paper or thin card-board. The principle of the use of the "spirit trumpet" is
precisely that of the well-known megaphone, i.e., it magnifies the sound, and increases its
carrying power. A spirit speaking in the faintest whisper through the trumpet is enabled to have
its voice heard plainly by those present in the circle, where otherwise nothing would be heard.
Often the spirit force is so strong that it will pick up the trumpet and carry it around the circle,
tapping the various members thereof, and whispering through it into the ear of some particular
members. Weak spirits, therefore, who are unable to make themselves heard in the ordinary way,
often employ the trumpet with effect in seances. When the trumpet is used, it should be placed
on the table, awaiting the use of the spirits.

Spirit Playing on Musical Instruments, Etc.

The spirit forces also sometimes will see fit to play upon musical instruments placed in the
cabinet with the medium, the guitar, mandolin, concertina, accordion, etc., being the instruments
preferred in such cases. Of course the sceptics will claim that the medium may play the
instruments himself or herself, and thus give ground for the claim of fraud; consequently in the
case of public seances, and many 270 private ones as well, the medium will insist upon having his
or her hands tied, and other precautions taken to eliminate the possibility of fraud and deception.
Such precautions are in no way a reflection upon the medium, and are, in fact, demanded by
many mediums as a matter of self-respect, self-protection, and the cause of truth. In many cases
in which the mediums were entirely lacking in musical education, knowledge, or training, the
spirits have performed skilled selections of music upon the instruments in the cabinet.

Independent Slate Writing.

What is generally known as "independent slate writing" is a very interesting phase of

mediumship, and one of the peculiarities thereof is that such phenomena is sometimes produced
through mediums who seem to possess little or no mediumistic powers in other directions. In
independent slate writing there is no employment of the hands of the medium by the spirit to
form the letters, words, and sentences of the communication. On the contrary, the writing is done
directly by the spirit forces, independent of the organism of the medium. Of course the psychic
power of the medium and his vital energy as well is drawn upon by the spirits in producing this
form of manifestation, but the medium is sometimes seated out of reach of the slates and in no
case actually touches the pencil.

The Slate Writing Circle.

Independent slate writing is performed as follows: The circle selects two common slates, or else
one folding slate. A small bit of chalk, or a tiny piece 271 of slate pencil is placed between the
two slates, the latter being then placed tightly together, and then bound with thick, strong twine
—in some cases the ends of the twine are fastened with sealing wax. This trying and sealing is
for the purpose of eliminating the suspicion of fraud or deceit, and for the purpose of
scientifically establishing the genuineness of the phenomena. The bound slates are then placed
on the table in the middle of the circle. In some cases the medium rests his hands on the slate,
and in other cases he keeps his hands entirely away from them—the phenomena itself evidently
being produced with equal facility in either case. A written question may either be placed inside
the slate on a small bit of paper, or else sealed and placed on top of the tied slates. In some cases
the scratching sound of the pencil may be heard proceeding from the tied slates, while on others
no sound is heard while the writing is being done. When the slates are opened, at the end of the
seance, the slates will be found to contain writing—the answer to the question, or else a general
message to the circle—the writing sometimes consisting of but a word or two, while in other
cases both of the inside surfaces of the slate will be found to be covered with writing. It often
requires quite a number of sittings before this phase of phenomena is secured; in many cases it is
never actually secured in a satisfactory form.

Spirit Paintings.

There are cases of record in which crayon drawings have been produced on the slates by
enclosing small bits of various colored crayons therein when the slates are tied together. Again,
oil paintings 272 have been secured on the slates, after small dabs of oil paint of various colors
have been placed on the inside surface of the slates, a little linseed oil being poured on each.

Fraudulent Slate Writing.

Slate phenomena has been brought into some degree of discredit and disrepute during the past
ten years or more, by reason of the fact that a number of unscrupulous "fakers," or bogus-
mediums, employed a system where this class of phenomena was counterfeited by trick methods.
But, as all careful investigators of mediumistic phenomena well know, some wonderful results
are still obtained, quietly and without publicity or notoriety, in many family or private circles. In
this case, and in many others, the very best mediumistic phenomena is often produced in those
family or private circles, where mutual sympathy, harmony, and spiritual understanding prevail,
and where there is an absence of the sceptical, cavilling, negative mental attitudes, which tend to
interfere with the free flow of spirit power and the degree of manifestation. The tiny flame
burning on the family altars and in the private shrines serve to keep alive the Light of the Spirit,
which is too often dimmed by the public glare of counterfeit and sensational exhibitions of so-
called spirit power.

Practical Advice to Developing Mediums.

The young developing medium who has read the foregoing pages of this book will in all
probability soon discover just what phase of mediumship is best suited for his natural powers,
temperament and 273 psychic constitution. As his innate psychic powers unfold and develop he
will be almost instinctively led in the particular directions in which these powers may find the
opportunity for the best form of expression and manifestation. And, at the same time, the spirit
friends which the young medium will have drawn to himself will have discovered, by means of
experimentation, just what phase of mediumship the young medium would best develop in order
to convey the messages and communications from the spirit side of life. The following bits of
advice from mediumistic writers of good standing will, however, perhaps serve to make the path
clearer for the young medium who is reaching out toward the best and most efficient form of
manifestation of the powers which he has found are within himself.

Need of Special Development.

A writer says: "As a general rule, the best results of mediumship are secured by special
development along the lines of natural aptitude. A 'Jack of all trades is master of none,' and such
a one is a failure in mediumship as in anything else. You may find it helpful to visit a public
medium who is already developed, and who can examine you and give you insight into your
natural psychic powers, and counsel you regarding your qualifications and aptitudes, and tell you
what to do. But do not attach too much importance to directions received in that way, because so
much depends upon the knowledge and power of the operator. One spirit might use you with
success in one direction, and another in some other phase; just as one mesmerist may make 274 a
subject clairvoyant when another has previously attempted to do so and failed. Nothing but
actual experience will settle that point. If, however, after a reasonable amount of patient devotion
to the experiment you do not succeed, or are disappointed with what has been done, it will be
advisable to effect a change in the conditions. A dissatisfied state of mind is a dangerous one.
You may, if you choose, sit by yourself, and try to obtain table movements, or to get 'automatic'
or passive writing. You can make experiments in psychometry or try crystal gazing, or endeavor
to visualize and to become clairaudient, but we should not advise you to sit alone and invite
spirits to put you into the trance. It is better to join some good private circle."
 Advice to Discouraged Mediums.

A writer gives the following excellent advice to young mediums who have become somewhat
discouraged at their lack of success, and slowness of progress: "You have been already informed
that you are a medium, and that if you sit you will develop special gifts. But you may say: 'I have
sat, and have not developed as I was assured I should.' That is quite probable. The medium
whom you consulted may have misjudged your capabilities; the spirit may have estimated what
he could have done with or through you, and, from his point of view, may have been perfectly
accurate; but possibly the spirits who have endeavored to develop you were unable to succeed.
People often say: 'I have been told many times that I should make a good medium, but I have not
had satisfactory results.' When we hear such statements we are 275 prompt to ask: 'Have you sat
for development for any length of time in a harmonious and congenial circle? You cannot expect
growth unless you give the requisite conditions. You might as well anticipate a harvest without
sowing the seed—just because you bought a sack of wheat! The marvelous results achieved by
expert acrobats and athletes are due to their indomitable determination to succeed, and their
steady and continuous training of eye, and muscle, and nerve. They concentrate their attention
and focus all their powers, and are at once temperate, patient, and persevering in their
experiments. The same spirit of devotion; the same firm attitude and watchful attention to all the
details; and the same observance of the conditions, physical, mental, moral, and spiritual, are
needed if you would educate yourself and become a fit and serviceable instrument for exalted
spirit intelligence to afford humanity the benefit of their experiences "over there."'"

Avoid Cross-Magnetism.

A popular mediumistic writer has given the following excellent words of warning to young
mediums: "Do not go into public promiscuous 'developing circles.' There is always a danger of
'cross magnetism' and disorderly manifestations in such gatherings. Owing to the mixed and
inharmonious mental, moral, and physical conditions which necessarily exist where a number of
strangers and curiosity seekers are attracted, you run the risk of being affected by undeveloped,
unprincipled, frivolous, mercenary, self-assertive, or even immoral spirits, who, being attracted
to such assemblies, seek to influence incautious and susceptible people who ignorantly 276 render
themselves liable to their control. The people 'on the other side' are human beings of all grades;
they are not morally purified by passing through the death-change; and as we are constantly
sending into their other state 'all sorts and conditions of people,' you need not be at all surprised
if you get into intercourse with the vain and foolish, the unreliable and pretentious, or the selfish
and sinful, if you indiscriminately open the doors of your psychic self and give a free invitation
to any spirit 'passer by.'"

Avoid Psychic Absorption.

"You can waste your time, and you can sit in circles, absorb all kinds of psychological
influences, exhaust your own, and in many cases become so filled up with contending influences
that you are in a state of psychological fever all the time, or so exhaust yourself that you will
become as limp and useless as a rag. This is not the way to use the opportunities you have; and
you should avoid the injudicious, promiscuous, and insane methods of development of many
who are extremely anxious to develop you as a medium, and who often bring discredit upon the
subject of mediumship, and do no one the slightest practical good—not even themselves. We
admit that the motives of those who conduct public promiscuous developing circles are good in
most cases, but their methods are frequently 'injudicious'—to put it mildly. Under ordinary
circumstances, your own pure purpose and the spirits who are in sympathy with your exalted
desires and intentions, are sufficient safeguards against the intrusion of low, mischievous or
malicious spirits, but you should not venture into conditions which require 277 the trained and
disciplined will, and the influence of wise and powerful spirits to protect you against danger,
until you have acquired the ability to render yourself positive to the psychic spheres of
undesirable people, both in or out of the physical body, and can voluntarily become passive and
responsive to the true and trustworthy friends whom you know and love."

The Stewardship of Great Powers.

We can not hope to more fitly close this book devoted to the brief presentation of the facts of the
psychic world, and the world of spirit, than by quoting the following words uttered by a faithful
laborer in the vineyard of spiritualism: "Spiritualism helps us to understand the 'unity of spirit'
and 'the brotherhood of man' in the divine relationship wherein the greatest among us is the
servant of all. The possession of great gifts is an added responsibility. We are only stewards of
our powers on behalf or others, and our desire to gain knowledge and influence should be
vitalized and dignified by the intention to use them to help, teach, and serve our fellows, and in
such service we shall ourselves be blest."
FINIS.

Transcriber's Notes

Page 3: Interpretating amended to Interpenetrating; Tranformation amended to Transformation.

"Unchartered Seas" sic
Page 4: Varities amended to Varieties
Page 5: Full stop added after VII; Temperment amended to Temperament; It amended to Is
Page 6: Phosphoresece amended to Phosphorescence
Page 7: preceived amended to perceived
Page 9: "Subnormal" sic; Byond amended to Beyond; opening quote marks added to "supernormal"
Page 19: "subdivisions, and sub-divisions" sic
Page 20: occulists amended to occultists; terrestial amended to terrestrial. Missing closing quotes for
quotation added after 'radiant energy.' "Several great class" sic
Page 23: Kellar amended to Keller; duplicate "have" removed
Page 24: Kellar amended to Keller
Page 28: interpretating amended to interpreting; pagaent amended to pageant
Page 29: preception amended to perception
Page 30: duplicate word "of" removed
Page 34: One instance of Ochorowicz, one instance of Ochoriwicz. Left as is
Page 37: second comma in 400,000,000,000,000 removed; beyound amended to beyond; tremblngs
amended to tremblings; eough amended to enough
Page 40: wthout amended to without; phenoment amended to phenomena
Page 41: Roetgen amended to Roentgen
Page 42: senes amended to senses
Page 45: duplicate line of text removed
Page 50: menium amended to medium
Page 51: transfrence amended to transference
Page 54: thought-wives amended to thought-waves
Page 57: coldenss amended to coldness
Page 61: pheonmena amended to phenomena; beenficial amended to beneficial
Page 63: a amended to at
Page 66: resistence amended to resistance
Page 68: implicity amended to implicitly
Page 84: infinitessimal amended to infinitesimal
Page 85: antedeluvian amended to antediluvian
Page 92: Certain amended to Certainly; ont amended to not
Page 94: mainfested amended to manifested
Page 99: Symbollic amended to Symbolic; symbollically amended to symbolically; sudent amended to
student
Page 101: rendiiton amended to rendition
Page 103: self-stupefication sic
Page 105: very amended to vary
Page 109: occultist amended to occultists
Page 120: "There is ... many degrees" sic
Page 123: unforseen amended to unforeseen
Page 126: Section heading Absolute Time relocated from middle of paragraph; unescapable sic
Page 135: being amended to beings
Page 136: Spritualism amended to Spiritualism
Page 137: enlighted amended to enlightened
Page 138: adherance amended to adherence
Page 145: perseverence amended to perseverance; unconciously amended to unconsciously
Page 155: occulists amended to occultists
Page 160: produtcion amended to production
Page 170: genearly amended to generally
Page 174: Missing full stop added
Page 174: fundmental amended to fundamental
Page 182: "Materializations follows" sic
Page 185: parthway amended to pathway
Page 186: "modus operana" sic
Page 187: apostrophe added to others
Page 190: "personal composition" sic
Page 203: uninterupted amended to uninterrupted; Psyschic amended to Psychic
Page 210: meduim amended to medium; coures amended to course
Page 213: "finnicky" and "finnickiness" sic
Page 215: senuous amended to sensuous
Page 219: healings amended to healing
Page 223: phychic amended to psychic; "subject is" amended to "subject if"
Page 225: comma after auto replaced with hyphen
Page 232: showe amended to show
Page 235: super-senous amended to super-sensuous
Page 236: Condtiion amended to Condition
Page 243: himeslf amended to himself
Page 249: how amended to now
Page 252: "clear and," amended to "clear, and"
Page 256: indicte amended to indicate
Page 260: showly amended to slowly
Page 265: materilaization amended to materialization
Page 267: mediumsistic amended to mediumistic
Page 268: phemonea amended to phenomena
Page 269: accordian amended to accordion
Page 270: State amended to Slate
Page 276: ignoranty amended to ignorantly
Small inconsistencies between the Table of Contents and the section titles, such as spelling, capitalization
and hyphenation have been retained. In addition to these the following discrepancies are here noted, but
have been retained:

Pag Part Note

e
3 I In the Table of Contents Super-sensible Vibrations should be followed by The
Higher Vibrations. The Higher Senses of Man is The Higher Senses of Men on page
21. In the Table of Contents Discovery of New Worlds should be followed by
Transcendental Senses.
III The Categories of Thought is titled The Contagion of Thought on page 56.
4 In the Table of Contents Repelling Adverse Influences should be followed by
Neutralizing Psychic Influences.
IV Classification of Clairvoyant Phenomena is Classification According to General
Distinctions on page 81.
V In the Table of Contents Absolute Time should be followed by: The Occult
Hypothesis. "The Prophecy of Cazotte." The Dinner of the Elect. The Illuminatus.
The Beginning of the Prophecy. The Shadow of the Guillotine. The Fall of the
Great. The Fate of Royalty. The Fulfillment of the Prophecy. Other Historical
Instances. The Eternal Verities.
5 VII Spirit Impersonation is titled Spirit Inspiration on page 165. Inspirational Speaking
is titled Inspirational Writing on page 168.
VIII In the Table of Contents The Jacob's Ladder of Communion should be followed by
The Attainment of Excellence.
6 IX Difficulties Among Spirits is Differences Among Spirits on page 215. In the Table
of Contents Self-Protection for Mediums should be followed by: Danger in
Indiscriminate Magnetizing. Detrimental Magnetic Influence. Mediumistic Auto-
Suggestion. "Psychic Sponges." Investigate Your Spirits. Spirits Are Still Human
Beings. Beware of Domineering Spirits.
X Impersonating Manifestations does not appear in the text.
XI In the Table of Contents Spirit Paintings should be followed by: Fraudulent Slate
Writing. Practical Advice to Developing Mediums should be followed by: Need of
Special Development. Advice to Discouraged Mediums. Avoid Cross-Magnetism.
Avoid Psychic Absorption. The Stewardship of Great Powers.

Section titles sometimes end with a full stop, and other times not: left as is.
Quotation marks and hyphenation have generally been standardised. Where a word occurs an equal
number of times as hyphenated and unhyphenated, both forms have been retained. Where two spellings of
a word have been used (for example, magnetiser/magnetizer; skeptic/sceptic) both have been retained.

End of the Project Gutenberg EBook of Genuine Mediumship or The Invisible

Powers, by Bhakta Vishita

*** END OF THIS PROJECT GUTENBERG EBOOK GENUINE MEDIUMSHIP ***

***** This file should be named 25337-h.htm or 25337-h.zip *****

This and all associated files of various formats will be found in:
http://www.gutenberg.org/2/5/3/3/25337/

Produced by Suzanne Lybarger, Brian Janes and the Online

Distributed Proofreading Team at http://www.pgdp.net

Updated editions will replace the previous one--the old editions

will be renamed.

Creating the works from public domain print editions means that no
one owns a United States copyright in these works, so the Foundation
(and you!) can copy and distribute it in the United States without
permission and without paying copyright royalties. Special rules,
set forth in the General Terms of Use part of this license, apply to
copying and distributing Project Gutenberg-tm electronic works to
protect the PROJECT GUTENBERG-tm concept and trademark. Project
Gutenberg is a registered trademark, and may not be used if you
charge for the eBooks, unless you receive specific permission. If you
do not charge anything for copies of this eBook, complying with the
rules is very easy. You may use this eBook for nearly any purpose
such as creation of derivative works, reports, performances and
research. They may be modified and printed and given away--you may do
practically ANYTHING with public domain eBooks. Redistribution is
subject to the trademark license, especially commercial
redistribution.

*** START: FULL LICENSE ***

THE FULL PROJECT GUTENBERG LICENSE

PLEASE READ THIS BEFORE YOU DISTRIBUTE OR USE THIS WORK

To protect the Project Gutenberg-tm mission of promoting the free

distribution of electronic works, by using or distributing this work
(or any other work associated in any way with the phrase "Project
Gutenberg"), you agree to comply with all the terms of the Full Project
Gutenberg-tm License (available with this file or online at
http://gutenberg.org/license).
Section 1. General Terms of Use and Redistributing Project Gutenberg-tm
electronic works

1.A. By reading or using any part of this Project Gutenberg-tm

electronic work, you indicate that you have read, understand, agree to
and accept all the terms of this license and intellectual property
(trademark/copyright) agreement. If you do not agree to abide by all
the terms of this agreement, you must cease using and return or destroy
all copies of Project Gutenberg-tm electronic works in your possession.
If you paid a fee for obtaining a copy of or access to a Project
Gutenberg-tm electronic work and you do not agree to be bound by the
terms of this agreement, you may obtain a refund from the person or
entity to whom you paid the fee as set forth in paragraph 1.E.8.

1.B. "Project Gutenberg" is a registered trademark. It may only be

used on or associated in any way with an electronic work by people who
agree to be bound by the terms of this agreement. There are a few
things that you can do with most Project Gutenberg-tm electronic works
even without complying with the full terms of this agreement. See
paragraph 1.C below. There are a lot of things you can do with Project
Gutenberg-tm electronic works if you follow the terms of this agreement
and help preserve free future access to Project Gutenberg-tm electronic
works. See paragraph 1.E below.

1.C. The Project Gutenberg Literary Archive Foundation ("the Foundation"

or PGLAF), owns a compilation copyright in the collection of Project
Gutenberg-tm electronic works. Nearly all the individual works in the
collection are in the public domain in the United States. If an
individual work is in the public domain in the United States and you are
located in the United States, we do not claim a right to prevent you from
copying, distributing, performing, displaying or creating derivative
works based on the work as long as all references to Project Gutenberg
are removed. Of course, we hope that you will support the Project
Gutenberg-tm mission of promoting free access to electronic works by
freely sharing Project Gutenberg-tm works in compliance with the terms of
this agreement for keeping the Project Gutenberg-tm name associated with
the work. You can easily comply with the terms of this agreement by
keeping this work in the same format with its attached full Project
Gutenberg-tm License when you share it without charge with others.

1.D. The copyright laws of the place where you are located also govern
what you can do with this work. Copyright laws in most countries are in
a constant state of change. If you are outside the United States, check
the laws of your country in addition to the terms of this agreement
before downloading, copying, displaying, performing, distributing or
creating derivative works based on this work or any other Project
Gutenberg-tm work. The Foundation makes no representations concerning
the copyright status of any work in any country outside the United
States.

1.E. Unless you have removed all references to Project Gutenberg:

1.E.1. The following sentence, with active links to, or other immediate
access to, the full Project Gutenberg-tm License must appear prominently
whenever any copy of a Project Gutenberg-tm work (any work on which the
phrase "Project Gutenberg" appears, or with which the phrase "Project
Gutenberg" is associated) is accessed, displayed, performed, viewed,
copied or distributed:

This eBook is for the use of anyone anywhere at no cost and with
almost no restrictions whatsoever. You may copy it, give it away or
re-use it under the terms of the Project Gutenberg License included
with this eBook or online at www.gutenberg.org

1.E.2. If an individual Project Gutenberg-tm electronic work is derived

from the public domain (does not contain a notice indicating that it is
posted with permission of the copyright holder), the work can be copied
and distributed to anyone in the United States without paying any fees
or charges. If you are redistributing or providing access to a work
with the phrase "Project Gutenberg" associated with or appearing on the
work, you must comply either with the requirements of paragraphs 1.E.1
through 1.E.7 or obtain permission for the use of the work and the
Project Gutenberg-tm trademark as set forth in paragraphs 1.E.8 or
1.E.9.

1.E.3. If an individual Project Gutenberg-tm electronic work is posted

with the permission of the copyright holder, your use and distribution
must comply with both paragraphs 1.E.1 through 1.E.7 and any additional
terms imposed by the copyright holder. Additional terms will be linked
to the Project Gutenberg-tm License for all works posted with the
permission of the copyright holder found at the beginning of this work.

1.E.4. Do not unlink or detach or remove the full Project Gutenberg-tm

License terms from this work, or any files containing a part of this
work or any other work associated with Project Gutenberg-tm.

1.E.5. Do not copy, display, perform, distribute or redistribute this

electronic work, or any part of this electronic work, without
prominently displaying the sentence set forth in paragraph 1.E.1 with
active links or immediate access to the full terms of the Project
Gutenberg-tm License.

1.E.6. You may convert to and distribute this work in any binary,
compressed, marked up, nonproprietary or proprietary form, including any
word processing or hypertext form. However, if you provide access to or
distribute copies of a Project Gutenberg-tm work in a format other than
"Plain Vanilla ASCII" or other format used in the official version
posted on the official Project Gutenberg-tm web site (www.gutenberg.org),
you must, at no additional cost, fee or expense to the user, provide a
copy, a means of exporting a copy, or a means of obtaining a copy upon
request, of the work in its original "Plain Vanilla ASCII" or other
form. Any alternate format must include the full Project Gutenberg-tm
License as specified in paragraph 1.E.1.

1.E.7. Do not charge a fee for access to, viewing, displaying,

performing, copying or distributing any Project Gutenberg-tm works
unless you comply with paragraph 1.E.8 or 1.E.9.

1.E.8. You may charge a reasonable fee for copies of or providing

access to or distributing Project Gutenberg-tm electronic works provided
that

- You pay a royalty fee of 20% of the gross profits you derive from
 the use of Project Gutenberg-tm works calculated using the method
you already use to calculate your applicable taxes. The fee is
owed to the owner of the Project Gutenberg-tm trademark, but he
has agreed to donate royalties under this paragraph to the
Project Gutenberg Literary Archive Foundation. Royalty payments
must be paid within 60 days following each date on which you
prepare (or are legally required to prepare) your periodic tax
returns. Royalty payments should be clearly marked as such and
sent to the Project Gutenberg Literary Archive Foundation at the
address specified in Section 4, "Information about donations to
the Project Gutenberg Literary Archive Foundation."

- You provide a full refund of any money paid by a user who notifies
you in writing (or by e-mail) within 30 days of receipt that s/he
does not agree to the terms of the full Project Gutenberg-tm
License. You must require such a user to return or
destroy all copies of the works possessed in a physical medium
and discontinue all use of and all access to other copies of
Project Gutenberg-tm works.

- You provide, in accordance with paragraph 1.F.3, a full refund of any

money paid for a work or a replacement copy, if a defect in the
electronic work is discovered and reported to you within 90 days
of receipt of the work.

- You comply with all other terms of this agreement for free
distribution of Project Gutenberg-tm works.

1.E.9. If you wish to charge a fee or distribute a Project Gutenberg-tm

electronic work or group of works on different terms than are set
forth in this agreement, you must obtain permission in writing from
both the Project Gutenberg Literary Archive Foundation and Michael
Hart, the owner of the Project Gutenberg-tm trademark. Contact the
Foundation as set forth in Section 3 below.

1.F.

1.F.1. Project Gutenberg volunteers and employees expend considerable

effort to identify, do copyright research on, transcribe and proofread
public domain works in creating the Project Gutenberg-tm
collection. Despite these efforts, Project Gutenberg-tm electronic
works, and the medium on which they may be stored, may contain
"Defects," such as, but not limited to, incomplete, inaccurate or
corrupt data, transcription errors, a copyright or other intellectual
property infringement, a defective or damaged disk or other medium, a
computer virus, or computer codes that damage or cannot be read by
your equipment.

1.F.2. LIMITED WARRANTY, DISCLAIMER OF DAMAGES - Except for the "Right

of Replacement or Refund" described in paragraph 1.F.3, the Project
Gutenberg Literary Archive Foundation, the owner of the Project
Gutenberg-tm trademark, and any other party distributing a Project
Gutenberg-tm electronic work under this agreement, disclaim all
liability to you for damages, costs and expenses, including legal
fees. YOU AGREE THAT YOU HAVE NO REMEDIES FOR NEGLIGENCE, STRICT
LIABILITY, BREACH OF WARRANTY OR BREACH OF CONTRACT EXCEPT THOSE
PROVIDED IN PARAGRAPH F3. YOU AGREE THAT THE FOUNDATION, THE
TRADEMARK OWNER, AND ANY DISTRIBUTOR UNDER THIS AGREEMENT WILL NOT BE
LIABLE TO YOU FOR ACTUAL, DIRECT, INDIRECT, CONSEQUENTIAL, PUNITIVE OR
INCIDENTAL DAMAGES EVEN IF YOU GIVE NOTICE OF THE POSSIBILITY OF SUCH
DAMAGE.

1.F.3. LIMITED RIGHT OF REPLACEMENT OR REFUND - If you discover a

defect in this electronic work within 90 days of receiving it, you can
receive a refund of the money (if any) you paid for it by sending a
written explanation to the person you received the work from. If you
received the work on a physical medium, you must return the medium with
your written explanation. The person or entity that provided you with
the defective work may elect to provide a replacement copy in lieu of a
refund. If you received the work electronically, the person or entity
providing it to you may choose to give you a second opportunity to
receive the work electronically in lieu of a refund. If the second copy
is also defective, you may demand a refund in writing without further
opportunities to fix the problem.

1.F.4. Except for the limited right of replacement or refund set forth
in paragraph 1.F.3, this work is provided to you 'AS-IS' WITH NO OTHER
WARRANTIES OF ANY KIND, EXPRESS OR IMPLIED, INCLUDING BUT NOT LIMITED TO
WARRANTIES OF MERCHANTIBILITY OR FITNESS FOR ANY PURPOSE.

1.F.5. Some states do not allow disclaimers of certain implied

warranties or the exclusion or limitation of certain types of damages.
If any disclaimer or limitation set forth in this agreement violates the
law of the state applicable to this agreement, the agreement shall be
interpreted to make the maximum disclaimer or limitation permitted by
the applicable state law. The invalidity or unenforceability of any
provision of this agreement shall not void the remaining provisions.

1.F.6. INDEMNITY - You agree to indemnify and hold the Foundation, the
trademark owner, any agent or employee of the Foundation, anyone
providing copies of Project Gutenberg-tm electronic works in accordance
with this agreement, and any volunteers associated with the production,
promotion and distribution of Project Gutenberg-tm electronic works,
harmless from all liability, costs and expenses, including legal fees,
that arise directly or indirectly from any of the following which you do
or cause to occur: (a) distribution of this or any Project Gutenberg-tm
work, (b) alteration, modification, or additions or deletions to any
Project Gutenberg-tm work, and (c) any Defect you cause.

Section 2. Information about the Mission of Project Gutenberg-tm

Project Gutenberg-tm is synonymous with the free distribution of

electronic works in formats readable by the widest variety of computers
including obsolete, old, middle-aged and new computers. It exists
because of the efforts of hundreds of volunteers and donations from
people in all walks of life.

Volunteers and financial support to provide volunteers with the

assistance they need, is critical to reaching Project Gutenberg-tm's
goals and ensuring that the Project Gutenberg-tm collection will
remain freely available for generations to come. In 2001, the Project
Gutenberg Literary Archive Foundation was created to provide a secure
and permanent future for Project Gutenberg-tm and future generations.
To learn more about the Project Gutenberg Literary Archive Foundation
and how your efforts and donations can help, see Sections 3 and 4
and the Foundation web page at http://www.pglaf.org.

Section 3. Information about the Project Gutenberg Literary Archive

Foundation

The Project Gutenberg Literary Archive Foundation is a non profit

501(c)(3) educational corporation organized under the laws of the
state of Mississippi and granted tax exempt status by the Internal
Revenue Service. The Foundation's EIN or federal tax identification
number is 64-6221541. Its 501(c)(3) letter is posted at
http://pglaf.org/fundraising. Contributions to the Project Gutenberg
Literary Archive Foundation are tax deductible to the full extent
permitted by U.S. federal laws and your state's laws.

The Foundation's principal office is located at 4557 Melan Dr. S.

Fairbanks, AK, 99712., but its volunteers and employees are scattered
throughout numerous locations. Its business office is located at
809 North 1500 West, Salt Lake City, UT 84116, (801) 596-1887, email
business@pglaf.org. Email contact links and up to date contact
information can be found at the Foundation's web site and official
page at http://pglaf.org

For additional contact information:

Dr. Gregory B. Newby
Chief Executive and Director
gbnewby@pglaf.org

Section 4. Information about Donations to the Project Gutenberg

Literary Archive Foundation

Project Gutenberg-tm depends upon and cannot survive without wide

spread public support and donations to carry out its mission of
increasing the number of public domain and licensed works that can be
freely distributed in machine readable form accessible by the widest
array of equipment including outdated equipment. Many small donations
($1 to $5,000) are particularly important to maintaining tax exempt
status with the IRS.

The Foundation is committed to complying with the laws regulating

charities and charitable donations in all 50 states of the United
States. Compliance requirements are not uniform and it takes a
considerable effort, much paperwork and many fees to meet and keep up
with these requirements. We do not solicit donations in locations
where we have not received written confirmation of compliance. To
SEND DONATIONS or determine the status of compliance for any
particular state visit http://pglaf.org

While we cannot and do not solicit contributions from states where we

have not met the solicitation requirements, we know of no prohibition
against accepting unsolicited donations from donors in such states who
approach us with offers to donate.

International donations are gratefully accepted, but we cannot make

any statements concerning tax treatment of donations received from
outside the United States. U.S. laws alone swamp our small staff.

Please check the Project Gutenberg Web pages for current donation
methods and addresses. Donations are accepted in a number of other
ways including checks, online payments and credit card donations.
To donate, please visit: http://pglaf.org/donate

Section 5. General Information About Project Gutenberg-tm electronic

works.

Professor Michael S. Hart is the originator of the Project Gutenberg-tm

concept of a library of electronic works that could be freely shared
with anyone. For thirty years, he produced and distributed Project
Gutenberg-tm eBooks with only a loose network of volunteer support.

Project Gutenberg-tm eBooks are often created from several printed

editions, all of which are confirmed as Public Domain in the U.S.
unless a copyright notice is included. Thus, we do not necessarily
keep eBooks in compliance with any particular paper edition.

Most people start at our Web site which has the main PG search facility:

http://www.gutenberg.org

This Web site includes information about Project Gutenberg-tm,

including how to make donations to the Project Gutenberg Literary
Archive Foundation, how to help produce our new eBooks, and how to
subscribe to our email newsletter to hear about new eBooks.